JP2022028130A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing a game on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition comprises: start storage means (a game control device 300) capable of storing a start storage being an execution right of the game on the basis of the establishment of the predetermined condition; performance control means (a performance control device 300) for controlling a performance of the game; and display means (a display device 41) controlled by the performance control means to perform display concerning the game. The performance control means is capable of displaying on the display means a first start storage display (a decoration special symbol start storage display) corresponding to start storage and a second start storage display, and executing a start storage performance (a reservation display performance) in which the first start storage display operates. The operation amount of the first start storage display in the start storage performance is identical between a case in which the display mode of the first start storage display is a first display mode and a case in which the display mode is a second display mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of predetermined conditions.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, a decorative game corresponding to the game and a decorative game of the game. There is known a gaming machine capable of displaying a start memory display corresponding to a start memory that is an execution right and a display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-102768

However, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the game only by displaying the start memory display.
An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions
A start storage means capable of storing start memory, which is the right to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition,
Production control means to control the production of the game,
A display means that is controlled by the effect control means to display a game is provided.
The effect control means is
The first start memory display and the second start memory display corresponding to the start memory can be displayed on the display means, and the start memory effect in which the first start memory display operates can be executed.
The operation amount of the first start memory display in the start memory effect is characterized by being the same in the case where the display mode of the first start memory display is the first display mode and the case where the display mode is the second display mode. do.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged explanatory view which shows the detail of a batch display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. (A) A diagram illustrating an example of a clear pattern setting unit, and (b) a diagram illustrating an example of a RAM data structure. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the fraction of the result of a special symbol variation display game, the fraction of a big hit symbol, the fraction of a small hit symbol, and the fraction of a symbol per a short time symbol. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit determination process and the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the time saving symbol hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the normal probability fluctuation number update process. It is a figure for demonstrating transmission timing of a ceiling arrival command. It is a flowchart explaining the support operation setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the progress of a game. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of production. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of production. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of production. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of production. It is a figure which shows an example of the fractionation rate in the 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the gaming state in the 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the progress of a game in 1st modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the fractionation rate in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the gaming state in the 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the fractionation rate in the 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the gaming state in the 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the progress of a game in 3rd modification. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the gaming machine in 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing in 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the specific area switch monitoring process in 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual sphere processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the fractionation rate in the 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the gaming state in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the order of control processing in 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect in 6th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure change in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the process of displaying a special figure in 7th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the progress of a game in 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of the external information signal. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop symbol effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop symbol effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop symbol effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop symbol effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop symbol effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop symbol effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop symbol effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a hold display effect.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is axially attached to the outer frame (support frame) 11 at the left end portion seen from the front side. It is assembled so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 3) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

The glass frame 15 is provided with a display plate 350 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 at a position behind the cover glass 14. The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is composed of a light guide plate in which an image emerges by introducing light from a side end, but may be composed of a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When a predetermined display is not displayed on the display board 350, it is transparent and does not interfere with the visibility of the rear game board 30. Then, when a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350, the visibility of the rear gaming board 30 is reduced at the predetermined display portion. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through a predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may not be visible due to the predetermined display.

A model name display unit 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 is provided on the upper portion of the glass frame 15.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in the abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball discharged from a payout unit provided on the back surface side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22 and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 7) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, the effect button 25 also has a built-in drive source for vibrating the effect button 25. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function that gives a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25. The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a protruding state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is above the normal state). May be.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, a lower plate (dish) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card is ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine. Return button (discharge button) 27b to operate, balance display (balance display unit) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, upper plate operation lever to operate to let the game ball in the upper plate 21 flow down to the lower plate 23. 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by a player is provided. Further, on the left side of the effect button 25, a volume adjusting button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24, so that the hitting ball launching device launches the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. do. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 3). It can be performed.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a hitting ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate between the position of the upper part of the center case 40 and the position on the center side of the display device 41 from this position.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Three general winning openings 35 are arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). The game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).

To the right of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b, and the movable member 37b always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5) as a driving device (game). It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.
The normal variable winning device 37 can win a game ball even when the movable member 37b is closed, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, there is a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. It is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. Convert to a possible state. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5).

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, below the first special variable winning device 38, there is a first state in which the game ball can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 2 A special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. Convert to a possible state. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5).

The game area 32 below the starting winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like. Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal map variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4A, for example, the batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display device (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and a special figure 2 variation for a special figure 1 variation display game. The special figure 2 display (2nd special figure variation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) for the display game and the special figure 1 hold display 53 (C0, C1) for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 1 variation display game. ) And the special figure 2 hold display 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 (D0 to D3) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) and a gaming state that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10. It is provided with a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). The first game state display unit 56a (C6), which notifies the player of the left-handed (normal hit) and right-handed hitting method (the hitting method corresponding to the game state), is displayed on the game state display unit 56. The second game state display unit 56b (C7) for notifying that the time saving state (when the fluctuation time shortening function is operating), and notifying that the jackpot probability state is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. A third game state display unit 56c (D7) is provided. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the special figure probability is always constant, the third gaming state display unit 56c is not used.
Further, the batch display device 50 includes a normal map display device 57 (D4 to D6) for the normal map fluctuation display game and a normal map hold display 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the start storage number of the normal map fluctuation display game. I have.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the variation symbol numbers are alternately changed. The LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are off) and the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit (LED lamps A0, A2, A2). By alternately switching between A4 and A6 (the lights are off), it is displayed that the fluctuation is in progress. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "off", the result mode of the off (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 is turned on. ~ A7 is turned off), and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode other than the missed result mode (for example, LED lamps A0 to A7) is at least as a hit result mode (special result mode). The game result is displayed in the mode (a mode in which the three are turned on). The special figure 1 display 51 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 2 variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (c), the variation symbol numbers are alternately changed. The LED lamps B0, B2, B4, B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B7 are off) and the LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B7 are lit (LED lamps B0, B2, B2). B4 and B6 are turned off) alternately to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "off", the result mode of the off (for example, LED lamp B0 is turned on and LED lamp B1 is turned on. -B7 is turned off), and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode other than the missed result mode (for example, LED lamps B0 to B7) is at least as a hit result mode (special result mode). The game result is displayed in the mode (a mode in which the three are turned on). The special figure 2 display 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 53 determines the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, for example, FIG. As shown in (d), it is displayed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C0 and C1). The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 54 shows, for example, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52. As shown in 4 (d), the display is performed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C2 and C3). The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.

The round display unit 55 turns off all the LEDs (LED lamps D0 to D3) when not in the special game state, and in the special game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (e), depending on the result. The LED is turned on according to the number of rounds selected. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the first game state display unit 56a turns off the LED when the left-handed is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed (normal hit). , When the right-handed is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed (when right-handed), the LED is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the second game state display unit 56b turns on the LED when the time is shortened, and turns off the LED when the time is not shortened.
As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when it is in the high probability state when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED when it is not in the high probability state.

In the normal map fluctuation display game on the normal map display 57, during the variable display of the normal map fluctuation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (g), the variation symbol numbers are alternately changed to switch the LED lamp D5. It is displayed that the LED lamps D4 and D6 are in a fluctuating state by alternately switching between the lighting state and the lighting state of the LED lamps D4 and D6. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate that the result is "hit", and when the result is "missing", the plurality of LEDs are turned on. One of them (for example, LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate that it is out of order.
The normal figure hold indicator 58 determines the number of undigested balls (the number of normal figure start storage = the number of hold) among the number of balls passing through the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 57, for example, FIG. As shown in (h), the display is performed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply unit having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. It has a 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 or the like that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a special symbol symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (not shown). Random number generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in various reach and variation display without reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock variation display game, etc. It is equipped with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A does not consider the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game and the probability state is constant in the game machine of the present embodiment, but is not considered as the current game state. Figure Fluctuation display Based on the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the game, the number of start storages, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the like. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, connected to the out ball detection switch 32a that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is low. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal such as 7V is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. Will be done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a is input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on a front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10, and a game machine. The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole for inserting the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it goes off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values. The probability value corresponding to the probability setting value may be different in all of the settings 1 to 6, or may be the same probability value in a plurality of the settings 1 to 6. Further, the same probability value may be used for all of the settings 1 to 6.

When selecting the probability setting value, turn on the power of the game machine while operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value change mode is set, and the probability setting value can be changed by operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability setting value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability set value information while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

Further, by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is the performance display device. It is displayed in 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is in the open state.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise is removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. To output the operation data of the winning port solenoid 2) 39b and the normal electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal variable winning device 37, and to output the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability set value. It is a port.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit). 138a, the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the above, and the fourth that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. A fifth driver 138e is provided, which receives the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the driver 138d and the second output port 134, generates a drive signal, and outputs the drive signal. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. DC5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the fifth driver 138e so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5V can be driven.
Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. do not have.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate. The switch 34a is provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. Has been done. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the specific input unit, which is one of the input units of the gaming microcomputer 111, has a clear range of data of the RAM 111C by changing the input state to the specific input unit. A clear pattern setting unit 114 is provided so as to be able to change. The clear pattern setting unit 114 has a detachable resistor R2, and when the resistor R2 is removed, the input to the specific input section is on, and when the resistor R2 is attached, the input to the specific input section is input. It is designed to be off.

FIG. 6B shows a part of the data structure of the RAM 111C. The area starting from 0000h, which is the start address, is provided with a setting storage area for storing information related to the setting such as the probability setting value. In the area following this set storage area, the ceiling, such as the number of normal probability fluctuations for managing the number of games until reaching the so-called ceiling, which starts the normal electric support by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times. A ceiling count area is provided to store information related to the control of. An area for storing various game data is provided in the area following the ceiling number area.

When the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the input to the specific input unit of the gaming microcomputer 111 is not turned on, that is, the state where the resistor R2 of the clear pattern setting unit 114 is attached. If so, the RAM is initialized with the address 1 as the start address. As a result, the area other than the set storage area is cleared.
Further, when the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated and the input to the specific input unit of the gaming microcomputer 111 is on, that is, the resistor R2 of the clear pattern setting unit 114 is removed. If this is the case, the RAM is initialized with the address 2 as the start address. As a result, the area excluding the set storage area and the ceiling count area is cleared.

By making the operation at the time of RAM clear different depending on the state of the clear pattern setting unit 114 in this way, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that does not clear the ceiling count area at the time of RAM clear at the time of mass production, the design of the gaming machine. By attaching the resistor R2 at the time or during the test, it becomes possible to arbitrarily clear the ceiling frequency region, and the design and the test can be efficiently advanced. Further, since it is only necessary not to attach the resistor R2 at the time of mass production, efficient production can be performed.

Further, since the information from the clear pattern setting unit 114 to the specific input unit is directly input to the CPU 111A without going through another device, it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts. Further, by adopting the data structure of the RAM 111C as shown in FIG. 6B, it is only necessary to change the address to be set according to the state of the specific input unit, and the control can be simplified.

The clear pattern setting unit 114 is not limited to the above configuration, and may be any type as long as it can change the input state to the specific input unit. For example, the input state to the specific input unit may be changed by switching the switch. Further, in the game control device, a game control board on which electronic components are mounted is enclosed in a board box, and the clear pattern setting unit 114 cannot be operated when the game control board is enclosed in the board box. However, the game control board may be operable even when it is enclosed in the board box.

Further, the data structure of the RAM 111C is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration. For example, other data may be stored in an area closer to the start address than the setting storage area. Data that is not cleared when the RAM is cleared can be stored in this area. Further, it is sufficient that the ceiling count area is cleared when the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated and the input to the specific input unit of the gaming microcomputer 111 is on, and the RAM 111C The ceiling count area may be arranged anywhere.

From the above, the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is comprehensively controlled in the game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player. A game control means (game control device 100) is provided, and the game control means includes an initialization means (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes stored information by performing a predetermined operation, and an initialization means. An initialization area setting means (clear pattern setting unit 114) that enables selection of an area to be initialized is provided.
Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily select the area to be initialized, and it is possible to efficiently proceed with the design and test of the gaming machine.

Further, the game control means is provided with a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won. It is possible to control in either one of the first state and the second state, which is easier to win than the first state, and to set the second state based on the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible, and the initialization area setting means can select whether or not to initialize the area for counting the number of times the game is executed.
Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily select the area to be initialized, and it is possible to efficiently proceed with the design and test of the gaming machine.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PRO (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) (for example, a frame decoration device 18 including a display board 350) are provided. A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting such as and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting a state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from the hitting ball launching device toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or the game area flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32. It is discharged from 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general winning opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37, and the normal variable winning device. It is possible to aim for a prize in the general winning opening 35, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the 37.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start storages is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The stored number of the normal map start prize is displayed on the normal map hold display 58 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory for starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is judged. Then, the process of starting the normal map fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the normal map display 57 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process for executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the ordered order, the process of displaying the normal map fluctuation display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the normal figure display 57 is composed of a display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the fluctuations for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. It may be configured.

If the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display 57, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to display the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of sync, the normal map display 57 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the out of alignment.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game is the same fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the presence or absence of the normal power support. In addition, the probability of hitting a normal map is 0 when the normal power is not supported, and the probability of hitting a normal figure is 99/100 when the normal power is being supported.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition to storing, the second start memory, which forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the special symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The random number value is stored in the RAM 111C as the first start storage and the second start storage. Then, the stored number of the start storage is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 53 and the special figure 2 hold display 54 for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and is displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is played on the second fluctuation display device). Then, when both the first start memory and the second start memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). While controlling the execution of the first special figure variation display game), the special figure 2 variation is based on the second start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning area). It serves as an execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, the execution control means performs the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory from the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory in a state where the first start memory and the second start memory are stored. Is also configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). It becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and the probability of hitting is high). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed by (with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device 41. The display game is now running. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. However, they may be displayed in the same display area or in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special map variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 variablely displays the decorative identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (decorative variable display game). It is a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

FIG. 8 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8A, for example, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game: a big hit, a small hit, and a time-saving symbol hit. The time-saving symbol hit is to start the Fuden support without going through the special game state. The jackpot distribution rate is the same for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. The distribution rates for small hits, time-saving symbols, and misses are different between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In particular, in Special Figure 2, the out-of-order result is not derived. It should be noted that the out-of-order result may be derived even in the special figure 2. Further, in FIG. 8A, the small hit and the time-saving symbol hit can be won in either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, but may be won only in the special figure 2.

For jackpots, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, there is a jackpot with support as a jackpot symbol (result mode of the jackpot), a jackpot with support is displayed, and a jackpot without support is stopped and displayed. There are two types. A jackpot with support will be in a state with normal power support (time saving state) only for the next game after the end of the special game state, and a big hit without support will be in a state without normal power support after the end of the special game state. be. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the special figure probability is always constant, there is no probability fluctuation due to the derivation of the jackpot. In the first special gaming state (big hit gaming state), which is a special gaming state based on the derivation of the jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. In addition, after the end of the special game state, only the next special figure fluctuation display game will be in a state with normal electric support.
In FIG. 8B, the distribution rate of the jackpot type is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Further, in FIG. 8B, the distribution rate of the jackpot type is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different.

Further, for the small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 8C, the small hit A symbol is stopped and displayed as the small hit symbol (result mode of the small hit), and the small hit B symbol is stopped and displayed. There are two types of small hits B. In the second special gaming state (small hit gaming state), which is a special gaming state based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.
In FIG. 8 (c), the fraction of the small hit type is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Further, in FIG. 8C, the fractions of the small hit type are the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different. Further, the small hit A and the small hit B may be different only in the stop symbol, or may be different in the opening mode of the second special variable winning device 39. Further, only one type of small hit may be used.

Further, for the time-saving symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. 8 (d), as a time-saving symbol per symbol (result mode of the time-saving symbol), the time-saving symbol A symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time-saving symbol hit A and the time-saving symbol. There are three types: B per time-saving symbol in which the hit B symbol is stopped and displayed, and C per time-saving symbol in which the C symbol per time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the time-saving symbol hit is neither a big hit nor a small hit, and it can be said that it is a kind of missed (results other than special results).
In FIG. 8 (d), the parts per portion per time-saving symbol are different in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be the same. Further, the time-saving symbols A to C differ only in the stop symbols, and in each case, only the next game is in a state where the normal electric support is provided, but only one type of time-saving symbols may be used.

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is equipped with a so-called ceiling function as shown in FIG. 8 (e). That is, when the number of times the game is executed reaches the number of ceilings (900 in this case), the specific game state (Public support) is generated without generating the special game state. The number of times the game is executed is always counted regardless of the presence or absence of the normal power support in the low probability state, and the counting is interrupted in the high probability state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the special figure probability is always constant, it is always counted. The number of times the game is executed is the total of the number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

The timing for clearing the counting result of the number of times the game is executed is when the chance mode (normal power support) triggered by the arrival of the number of times the ceiling n is reached, or when the condition device is activated (big hit game state). The timing for clearing the counting result of the number of times the game is executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, when clearing the number of times the game is executed is selected when operating the RAM initialization switch 112, or when the time saving symbol is hit. It may include the time when the chance mode (Public power support) is set, one or more of the above timings, or even when the power is turned on instead of when the RAM is cleared. good.

Further, among the RAM clearing, the measurement of the number of game executions may be cleared when the RAM is cleared without changing the setting, and the measurement of the number of game executions may not be cleared when the RAM is cleared with the setting change. The time when the RAM is cleared without changing the setting is, for example, when the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 152. In this way, by not clearing the measurement of the number of times the game is executed when the RAM is cleared with the setting change, it is possible to make it difficult to determine that the setting change has been made.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment.
The gaming states include the normal gaming state ST1, the first special gaming state ST2 based on the first special result (big hit), the second special gaming state ST3 based on the second special result (small hit), and the first specific gaming state ST4. be.
In each game state, there is an effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, a main start area which is a start area mainly to be aimed at in the game state, and a type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed. A certain main fluctuation special map and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a left-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the starting winning opening 36, and a right-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly advanced, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to play the game mainly in the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so that the game progresses. In this specification, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and shortens the variable time of the special figure variable display game or the normal figure variable display game. There is no time saving. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special map is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation.

The first special game state ST2 is a state in which there is no general electric support and there is no time saving. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the jackpot mode. In this first special gaming state ST2, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the firing direction is right-handed.

The second special game state ST3 is a state in which there is no general electric support and there is no time saving. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit mode. In this second special gaming state ST3, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, so that the firing direction is right-handed.

The first specific game state ST4 has a short time, the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the main starting area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the firing direction is aimed at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Is right-handed. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a chance mode.
The first specific gaming state ST4 includes a state ST41 with a normal power support and a state ST42 without a normal power support.

The transition of the gaming state is the derivation of the first special result (big hit), the end of the first special gaming state, the derivation of the second special result (small hit), the end of the second special gaming state, the derivation of the time-saving symbol, and the special. FIG. 2 This is performed by the end of the special figure variation display game in a state where all the starting memories have been digested.
For example, if a big hit occurs in the normal game state ST1, the mode shifts to the first special game state ST2. When the first special gaming state ST2 ends, if the transition to the first special gaming state ST2 is based on a big hit with support, it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST4 and the first special gaming state ST2. If the transition to is based on a jackpot without support, the transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed. After the end of the first special game state ST2, only the next game will be in the state of the normal electric support and the time reduction, so that the state will shift to the state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4.

When the game shifts to the first specific game state ST4, the normal variable winning device 37 is easily won by the normal variable winning device 37 and the second start memory is generated. Therefore, mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. The game progresses. In this first specific game state ST4, if a big hit occurs, the process shifts to the first special game state ST2. Further, in the first specific gaming state ST4, if a small hit occurs, the process shifts to the second special gaming state ST3. In addition, in the first specific game state ST4, when the time saving symbol hits, it becomes the state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4. Further, when the deviation result is derived, if there is a second start memory, the state ST42 is entered, and if there is no second start memory, the normal game state ST1 is entered. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since there is no deviation result in the special figure 2 variation display game, the case where the deviation result is derived in the first specific game state ST4 is the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed. Will be.

When a small hit occurs in the first specific gaming state ST4 and the transition to the second special gaming state ST3 occurs, there is no general electric support and time reduction in the second special gaming state ST2. In this embodiment, if the conditions for the Fukuden support and the time reduction are satisfied, only the next one game will be the Fukuden support and the time reduction. Even if there is support and time reduction, the game will shift to a state where there is no normal power support and time reduction due to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game, so in the second special game state ST3, there will be no normal power support and time reduction. ..

After the end of the second special gaming state ST3, if there is a second start memory, the process returns to the first specific gaming state ST4. That is, when the transition to the first specific gaming state ST4 occurs, the gaming state transitions between the first specific gaming state ST4 and the second special gaming state ST3 until there is no second start memory. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases due to the prize balls acquired in the second special gaming state ST3. This state in which the number of balls is increased continues until a big hit occurs and the player shifts to the first special game state ST2, or after the end of the second special game state ST3, there is no second start memory and the player shifts to the normal game state ST1. do.

As described above, although the gaming machine is provided with the normal electric support and the reduced working hours, in the second special gaming state ST3, there is always no general electric support and the reduced working hours. In the conventional gaming machine, when a specific period is provided to increase the player's ball due to the frequent occurrence of small hits in the special figure 2 variable display game, it is necessary to generate the second start memory even when there is no general electric support. Therefore, it was necessary to take measures against unintended games such as generating a second start memory other than a specific period. However, by configuring as described above, it is possible to have the normal power support only during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in a specific period, so that it is normal during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game other than the specific period. By setting the state without the electric support, it is possible to suppress the generation of the second start memory, and it becomes unnecessary to take measures against the unintended game as in the conventional case.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step). X11), output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer is used. A process (step X14) for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM. It is determined whether the value of the region 2 is the normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), the RAM error flag is cleared (step X20) because there is no abnormality in the RAM, and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step. It is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state based on the state read by X6 (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is issued to the effect control board (effect control). It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the command for notifying the main abnormality error is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the gaming control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM error flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and the speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being changed by outputting voice from the user.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM error flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N), that is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step X41 and the power failure occurs. Performs processing when it is restored normally.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43; Y), the initialization process is performed. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

First, it is determined whether the input to the specific input unit is on (step X71), and if it is not on (step X71; N), the RAM area other than the probability set value is cleared to 0. That is, when the resistance R2 of the clear pattern setting unit 114 is attached, the game is cleared including the ceiling number region that stores the normal probability fluctuation number that manages the number of games up to the ceiling.
When the input to the specific input unit is on (step X71; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 and the RAM area other than the probability set value and the ceiling count area is cleared to 0. That is, when the resistance R2 of the clear pattern setting unit 114 is removed, the normal probability variation number of times for managing the number of games up to the ceiling is not cleared.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X37). Based on receiving the command during the probability setting confirmation, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and the speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed by outputting the voice by.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or longer, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process in the probability setting value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information editing of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. To. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output a security signal for at least 50 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) (current state). Judgment based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
When the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and when a power failure has not occurred (step X34; N), step X33 is performed. Return, and if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 10 and 11) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec) between the process of enabling interrupts (step X32) and the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38 and X55). .. In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability set value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). Based on receiving the command to end the notification, the effect control device 300 ends the execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed). ..

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Performs a power failure recovery process (step X41) that saves an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in an area to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring). The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a model specification command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, a screen designation command, and reaching the ceiling. It sends multiple commands such as the normal probability fluctuation count command, which is information on the number of games up to. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the command is waiting for a customer. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, clear the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (customer waiting). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command, a support count information command, etc., which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with normal electric support, are also transmitted.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power is extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the winning symbol of the special figure is determined. After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a symbol random number and a random number (hit random number) that determines a hit of a normal figure (step X48), an interrupt is permitted (step X49). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the special symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the special symbol random number and hit random number are the same as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the periodic CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). Further, for the special symbol random number and the hit random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the special symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process in step X50, a process for prohibiting interrupts (step X51) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. Return to (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and if such a method is adopted, the initial value in both of them. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. There is an advantage that it is converted.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change / confirmation processing (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Output processing (step X105) for controlling the drive of an actuator such as the Fuden solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X106), the random number update process 1 (step X107), and the random number update process 2 (step X108) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial value (start value) of the special symbol symbol random number and the hit random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process, is updated. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) is performed to open the frame and monitor errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39.

Next, the special figure game process (step X112) for processing the special figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step X114) for performing the process related to the normal figure variation display game are performed, and the special figure game machine 10 is provided with the special figure game. Figure Fluctuation display Performs segment LED editing processing (step X115) that drives the segment LED that displays various information related to the display of the game and the game so as to display the desired content.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine if there is any abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153 are performed, and timer interrupt processing is completed. do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and special features based on the winning. Figure Fluctuation display Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The game result pre-judgment is performed.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, monitoring of the detection of a game ball by the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball on the large winning opening switch 39a.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A4). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been timed up, it is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A7). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change are in progress. Special figure for setting information necessary for processing, etc. Ordinary processing (step A9) is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A10) is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A11) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A12).
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big hit end processing are performed. The large winning opening residual ball processing (step A14) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the big hit end processing (step A15) for setting the information necessary for performing the special drawing normal processing is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare process (step A16) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A17) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. ..
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing are performed. The small hit remaining ball processing (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A19) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A20), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A21) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. .. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A22), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A23) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. Then, the special figure game processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A5; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process shifts to the process of step A20, and the subsequent processes are performed. conduct.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (start winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize for the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time reduction is in progress (during normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special time reduction is not in progress (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special time reduction is in progress (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform a notification (warning) instructing the effect control device 300 to perform a right-handed instruction.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table for the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning to the second starting port. Determination (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variation. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning of the game ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step. The process proceeds to the process of A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent event is occurring, it is determined that the fraudulent event is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A113 that the electric power fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature. Figure The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. Further, if it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is transmitted to the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A135; Y). Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (step A139).

Next, the special symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the special symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).
Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and is the starting right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a starting storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of memories. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting storage up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 16, first, a jackpot determination process (step A154) for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. When the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a special symbol random number check table for big hits corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and a step of common processing for the special start port switch is performed. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), the small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for small hits is set (step A161), and the preparation is made in step A140 of the special symbol start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the time-saving symbol hit determination process (step A160; N) is used to determine whether or not the jackpot random value is a time-saving symbol hit judgment value depending on whether or not it matches the time-saving symbol hit determination value. Step A163) is performed. Then, when the determination result is not a time-saving symbol hit (step A164; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A167), and the process proceeds to the process of step A168.
If the determination result is per time-saving symbol (step A164; Y), a special symbol random number check table for time-saving symbol per is set (step A165), and in step A140 of the special symbol start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process proceeds to step A168.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A169). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A171).
After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A173), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A170 and the variation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

Through the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command containing the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment, etc.) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step A309), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (step A309). A309; N) sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and an effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special figure normal processing is terminated. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command forming the standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A309 (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

If the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" in step A301 (step A301; N), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step A302). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.
If the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" in step A305 (step A305; N), a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 1 is prepared (step A306). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, if the special figure 2 hold number is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 18A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), and the first step is made. 1 The jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit is set with the deviation information and the jackpot information, and whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit is determined. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the missed information and the small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step A332). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 18A is performed in the second start. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 18B, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the first step is made. 2 The jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit is set with the deviation information and the jackpot information, and whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a small hit is determined. The big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed information and the small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step A352). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special figure variation display game execution control means for executing a special figure variation display game based on the start storage stored in the start storage means. Further, the special figure variation display game execution control means executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, and the second special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. Figure The variable display game will be executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 19A shows a jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the time saving symbol hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step A362), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step A363). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, a jackpot determination process (step A364) for determining whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is performed. When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A364) is a jackpot (step A365; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 (step A366). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A367) for determining the above is performed.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is a small hit (step A368; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361. (Step A369), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is not a small hit (step A368; N), the acquired big hit random value is per time-saving symbol depending on whether or not it matches the time-saving symbol hit determination value. The time-saving symbol hit determination process (step A371) for determining the presence or absence is performed.

When the determination result of the time-saving symbol hit determination process (step A371) is the time-saving symbol hit (step A372; Y), the time-saving symbol hit information is stored in the time-saving symbol hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361. Overwrite and save (step A373), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the time-saving symbol hit determination process (step A371) is not the time-saving symbol hit (step A372; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the time saving symbol hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 19B shows a jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the time saving symbol hit flag 2 area (step A381). Next, the big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step A382), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step A383). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

After that, a jackpot determination process (step A384) for determining whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is performed. When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A384) is a jackpot (step A385; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A381 (step A386). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is not a big hit (step A385; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A387) for determining the above is performed.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is a small hit (step A388; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A381. (Step A389), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is not a small hit (step A388; N), the acquired big hit random value is per time-saving symbol depending on whether or not it matches the time-saving symbol hit determination value. The time-saving symbol hit determination process (step A391) for determining the presence or absence is performed.

When the determination result of the time-saving symbol hit determination process (step A391) is the time-saving symbol hit (step A392; Y), the time-saving symbol hit information is stored in the time-saving symbol hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A381. Overwrite and save (step A393), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the time saving symbol hit determination processing (step A391) is not the time saving symbol hit (step A392; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the time saving symbol hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 20A shows the jackpot determination process (steps A364 and A384) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first, the upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability set value. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value, the jackpot judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A402), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A403). Here, the value of the lower limit determination value is the same regardless of the probability setting value, but the lower limit determination value may be different depending on the probability setting value. In this case, as in the case of the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected and set from the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be collectively used as a judgment value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A403; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A408), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. When the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A403; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407). The upper limit determination value set here is acquired with reference to the upper limit determination value table set in step A401 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A408), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A409), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 20B shows the small hit determination process (steps A367, A387) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A411). The small hit upper limit determination value is set for each probability set value. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value in the same probability set value do not overlap. The range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit determination can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A412). When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A412; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A414), and the small hit determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A412; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A413).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A413; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A414), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A413; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A415), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

[Time saving symbol hit judgment processing]
FIG. 21 shows the time-saving symbol hit determination process (steps A371 and A391) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this time-saving symbol hit determination process, first, the time-saving symbol hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A421). The upper limit judgment value table per time-saving symbol is provided for each probability set value.

The probability of winning the lottery per time-saving symbol may be different or the same for each probability set value. When making it different for each probability setting value, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery per time-saving symbol (that is, setting 1 is the easiest to win and setting 6 is the most difficult to win). It may be good or vice versa. Further, the probability of winning the lottery per the time-saving symbol may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
Further, the range of the big hit determination value, the range of the small hit determination value, and the range of the time-saving symbol hit determination value in the same probability set value are not overlapped. The range of the big hit judgment value, the range of the small hit judgment value, and the range of the time saving symbol hit judgment value between different probability set values may overlap, but may not overlap.

In addition, the time-saving symbol hit means that the big hit random number matches the time-saving symbol hit determination value. The time-saving symbol hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the time-saving symbol hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the time-saving symbol hit judgment value, and is the upper limit value of the time-saving symbol hit judgment value. When it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value per certain time-saving symbol, it is determined to be per time-saving symbol. By setting the upper limit judgment value table for the time-saving symbol corresponding to the probability set value, the time-saving symbol hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the time-saving symbol hit determination value is set (step A422), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value per time-saving symbol (step A423). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value per time-saving symbol is the same regardless of the probability setting value, but the lower limit judgment value per time-saving symbol may be different depending on the probability setting value. In this case, as in the case of the upper limit judgment value per time saving symbol, the lower limit judgment value table per time saving symbol in which the lower limit judgment value per time saving symbol is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value. Of course, the time-saving symbol per upper limit judgment value table and the time-saving symbol per lower limit judgment value table may be collectively used as a time-saving symbol hit judgment value table.

If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value per time-saving symbol (step A423; Y), that is, if it is not a time-saving symbol hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A428), and the time-saving symbol hit judgment process is performed. finish. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for each time-saving symbol has been missed. Further, when the value of the target jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value per time-saving symbol (step A423; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value per time-saving symbol (step A427). The time-saving symbol per upper limit determination value set here is acquired with reference to the time-saving symbol per upper limit determination value table set in step A421 described above.

If the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value per time-saving symbol (step A427; Y), that is, if it is not a time-saving symbol hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A428), and the time-saving symbol hit judgment process is completed. do. Further, when the value of the target big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value per time-saving symbol (step A427; N), that is, when it is per time-saving symbol, the time-saving symbol hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the time reduction is performed. The symbol hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 22 shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 1 special symbol random number storage area (number of pending numbers). Load the special symbol random number from (for 1) (step A432). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A434). The jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the time reduction determination data is obtained. It is saved in the area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). This information is for setting a variation pattern scenario which is information on the execution mode of the special gaming state, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special gaming state. .. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, when the big hit 1 flag is not a big hit (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and when it is a small hit (step A440; Y), a special figure. 1 The special symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A441). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A442), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A443). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is created. Prepare the corresponding decorative special drawing command (step A455).

Further, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the time saving symbol hit flag 1 is a time saving symbol hit (step A446), and when it is a time saving symbol hit (step A446; Y). , The special symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A447). Next, a symbol table per special symbol 1 time saving symbol is set (step A448), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). By this process, the type per time-saving symbol is selected.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A450). Step A451), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A452), and the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).
If the time-saving symbol hit flag 1 is not a time-saving symbol hit (step A446; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A453), and the missed stop symbol pattern is stopped. Save in the pattern area (step A454) and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A455). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A456), and the effect command setting process (step A457) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A458), and the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A459). Special figure 1 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 23 shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A471), and if it is a big hit (step A471; Y), the special figure 2 special symbol random number storage area (number of pending numbers). Load the special symbol random number from (for 1) (step A472). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A473), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A474). The jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A475), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A476). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A477), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the time reduction determination data is obtained. It is saved in the area (step A478), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A479). This information is for setting a variation pattern scenario which is information on the execution mode of the special gaming state, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special gaming state. .. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and when it is a small hit (step A480; Y), a special figure. 2 The special symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A481). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step A482), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A483). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is created. Prepare the corresponding decorative special map command (step A495).

Further, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the time saving symbol hit flag 2 is a time saving symbol hit (step A486), and when it is a time saving symbol hit (step A486; Y). , The special symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A487). Next, the special symbol 2 time-saving symbol per symbol table is set (step A488), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). By this process, the type per time-saving symbol is selected.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A490). Step A491), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A492), and the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).
If the time-saving symbol hit flag 2 is not a time-saving symbol hit (step A486; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A493), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped. Save in the pattern area (step A494) and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A495). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A496), and the effect command setting process (step A497) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A498), and the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A499). Special figure 2 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.
In this way, when setting the stop symbol of each result, the types of random numbers required can be reduced by using a common special symbol random number regardless of the result, and the specifications of the gaming machine and the program can be simplified. It is possible to reduce the burden of control.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 24 shows the special figure information setting process (steps A170, A324, A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 change start process, and the special figure 2 change start process.
First, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A461), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the game state, the number of holds, the stopped symbol pattern number, the number of remaining supports, and the currently set variable selection table group is acquired. (Step A462).
Then, the acquired variable group selection pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A465), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.

In the variation pattern selection process (steps A171, A326, A346) performed after this special figure information setting process, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table selected based on the variation group selection pointer acquired here.
That is, the variation pattern is selected based on the game state, the number of holds, the stop symbol pattern number, the number of remaining supports, and the currently set variation selection table group. By selecting the fluctuation pattern in consideration of such factors, it is possible to execute various effects.

From the above, the game is controlled by the gaming machine capable of executing the game based on the establishment of the starting condition and generating a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value when the result of the game becomes a special result. A game control means (game control device 100) and a normal variable winning device 37 for which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball are provided, and the game control means is normally changed between a normal game state and a normal game state. A specific gaming state in which it is easy to win a prize in the winning device 37 and a special gaming state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result among the special results, after the special gaming state is generated. When a specific game state can be generated and the result of the game is a specific result different from the special result, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state, and the result of the game is special. The result, the specific result, or the out-of-order result is determined by one first lottery random number (big hit random number), and before the game is executed, the result of the game is a special result and a specific result. It is possible to determine which of the two is the result of the deviation.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed by one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

The special results include a first special result (big hit) with the operation of the condition device and a second special result (small hit) without the operation of the condition device, and the game control means determines the result of the game. Which of the first special result, the second special result, the specific result, and the out-of-order result should be determined by one first lottery random number.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed by one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

Further, the first special result, the second special result and the specific result each include a plurality of types of results, and in the game control means, the lottery result by the first lottery random number is the first special result, the second special result or the specific result. If it is a result, the type of the first special result, the second special result, or the specific result is determined by using one second lottery random number (special symbol symbol random number).
Therefore, even if the results are different, the lottery control can be simplified and the burden of control can be reduced by using the common second lottery random number.

[Processing during special figure change]
FIG. 25 shows a special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special symbol changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a time-saving symbol hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, “2” related to the processing during display of the special figure is set as the processing number (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). Further, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2) is saved. (Turn off the fluctuating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the special figure for output to the external information terminal. (For example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611). ). Next, the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step A612) for managing the number of times the game is executed in the normal power support state (time reduction state) is performed, and the special figure change process is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
26 and 27 show a special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special symbol display processing, first, the time-saving symbol hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the time-saving symbol hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step). A701), clear the RWM time-saving symbol per flag 1 area and time-saving symbol per flag 2 area (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is loaded. And the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. Clear two areas (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), it is related to the start of the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game. Save the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, the special symbol 2 hit signal ON) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A710), and round. The number upper limit table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708), and when it is a jackpot (step A708; Y), the first special feature. The test signal (for example, ON the signal during operation of the condition device, ON the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device, ON the signal per special symbol 1) regarding the start of the jackpot of the figure variation display game (special figure 1 jackpot) is set to RWM. Saved in the test signal output data area (step A709), and set the round number upper limit value table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value (“10”, “7” or “2” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (step A712). ). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A713).

Next, the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result to a low probability state in the normal map fluctuation display game is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A717) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the effect command setting process (step). A719) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal map fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, in step A720, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned OFF otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal map fluctuation display game is set (step A721), and the set jackpot fanfare time is set to the special figure game processing timer area. Save to (step A722). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A723). As a result, information on the time saving state when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A724), and the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is set. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved (step A725).
Next, the initial value (900 in this case) is saved in the normal probability fluctuation frequency region (step A761). As a result, the measurement of the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is cleared at the start of the big hit game state (first special game state). It should be noted that the time when the condition device is activated (in the big hit game state) among the timings for clearing the measurement of the number of times the game is executed is not limited to the start of the big hit game state, and can be changed as appropriate during the big hit game state. For example, it may be at the end of the big hit game state.
After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, based on the result of the game control device 100 being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning. It serves as a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state that converts the device 39 into an open state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A708; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A727), and when it is a small hit (step A727; Y), it is determined. The test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 2 small hit signal) regarding the start of the small hit (special figure 2 small hit) of the second special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A730). , Normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A762).
If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A728), and if it is a small hit (step A728; Y). Saves the test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) regarding the start of the small hit (special figure 1 small hit) of the first special symbol variation display game in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step). A729), the normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A762) is performed.

Next, the effect mode information check process (step A732) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed, the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A734), and the effect command setting process (step A735) is performed. I do. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A736), an effect command setting process (step A737) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A738. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A738), and the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step) for shifting to the small hit fanfare middle process. A739) is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A728; N), it is determined whether the loaded time-saving symbol hit flag 2 is a time-saving symbol hit (step A740). In the case of per time saving symbol (step A740; Y), the normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A764) is performed. Further, the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.
In the special figure normal processing transition setting processing, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is saved as the processing number in the special figure game processing number area, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared, and the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag is used. Performs processing to save the flag in the area during the fraud monitoring period.
When the time-saving symbol hit flag 2 is not a time-saving symbol hit (step A740; N), it is determined whether the loaded time-saving symbol hit flag 1 is a time-saving symbol hit (step A741). In the case of per time saving symbol (step A741; Y), the normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A764) is performed. Further, the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

If the time-saving symbol hit flag 1 is not a time-saving symbol hit (step A741; N), the normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A765) is performed. Then, the effect mode information check process (step A745) related to the setting of the effect mode is performed, the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A746), and the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed are obtained. Is determined (step A747). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
If the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A747; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the special figure normal processing is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.

On the other hand, when the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A747; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A748), the effect command setting process (step A749) is performed, and the special effect is performed. Figure Special figure for shifting to normal processing Performs the normal process transition setting process (step A750), and ends the process during special figure display. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 28 shows the time reduction variation number update process (step A612) in the above-mentioned special figure variation process. In this time reduction fluctuation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric power support is in progress (step A751). Then, when the normal electric power support is not in progress (step A751; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the normal electric power support is in progress (step A751; Y), the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A752), and it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become "0" (step A753). ..

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A753; Y), the signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Next, the signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off. OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A755).

Next, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A756), the low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A757), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The no time saving flag is synthesized in (step A758). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a second start memory (step A759). When there is a second start memory (step A759; Y), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. When there is no second start memory (step A759; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and right-handed is being performed. In order to turn off the display LED (for example, the first game status display unit 56a), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step A761), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed. ..

[Production mode information check process]
FIG. 29 shows the effect mode information check process (steps A732 and A745) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771). When the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed.

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is "0" (step A773). If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process ends. Further, when the remaining rotation speed of the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RWM is acquired. Save to the area (step A777), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save to the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A778). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A783), and the effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A785), and an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), the effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is completed. .. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching from before the specified rotation speed of the effect mode switching. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 30 shows the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A792).

Next, the signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal is turned on (output by big hit + small hit) and 4 big hit signals are turned on (output by big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), signal related to the end of time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened The state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). ). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag is used. Save the low probability & no time saving flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (no time reduction) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A801), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the time reduction state is displayed. Clear the time reduction fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of games (step A802). As a result, the normal electric support state and the time saving state are terminated. In the case of a gaming machine that can set the special figure probability to a high probability state, the high probability state is terminated in this process.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the non-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). .. Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special gaming state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 31 shows a small hit fanfare process transition setting process (step A739) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this small hit fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare intermediate processing is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A812).
Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit (for example, one big hit signal is turned on (output as big hit + small hit)). ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A814).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A815), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A816).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A817), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A818), and the small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is completed.

[Normal probability fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 32 shows a normal probability fluctuation number update process (steps A762, A764, A765) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this normal probability fluctuation number update process, first, the normal probability fluctuation number is updated by -1 (step A62). As a result, the normal probability variation number (game execution number) is measured (updated) at the end of the stop display time of the special figure variation display game.
Since the special figure probability is always constant in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of normal probability fluctuations is always updated, but in the gaming machine capable of the probability fluctuation of the special figure probability, the probability is high. In some cases, the number of probability fluctuations is usually not updated.

Next, it is determined whether the number of normal probability fluctuations is equal to or less than a predetermined number (step A76). When the number of normal probability fluctuations is less than or equal to a predetermined number (step A76; Y), a normal probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the normal probability fluctuation number is prepared (step A63), and an effect command setting process (step A64) is performed. .. As a result, the normal probability fluctuation number command for notifying the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. If the number of normal probability fluctuations is not less than or equal to a predetermined number (step A76; N), the process proceeds to step A65.

When the number of games until reaching the ceiling is large, it is inefficient to always transmit the information on the normal probability fluctuation number because the utility value is not high even if the information on the normal probability fluctuation number is transmitted to the effect control device 300. be. In particular, when the number of games to reach the ceiling is more than 127 times, the amount of data to be transmitted requires 4 bytes, which is inefficient. Therefore, when the number of normal probability fluctuations is not less than a predetermined number, the information on the number of normal probability fluctuations is not transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, the command has a two-byte structure of "MODE" for identifying the type of the command and "ACTION" including the content of the command, and the range that can be taken is different in order to distinguish each of them. "MODE" and "ACTION" are distinguished by the most significant bit, and since it is 1 in MODE and 0 in ACTION, the range that can be taken as a numerical value is 128 to 255 for MODE and 0 to 127 for ACTION. Become. When transmitting a value exceeding 127 as ACTION, for example, 80h (= 128) indicating the lower number of times as MODE + the lower 7 bits of the value of the number of times as ACTION, and 81h (= 129) + 81h (= 129) indicating the upper number of times as MODE + the number of times. The command of the upper 7 bits of the value of is sent. To be exact, since the value is 2 bits less, it can only be transmitted up to 3ffff (= 16383), but information larger than this is usually unnecessary as information on the number of probability fluctuations, so two command transmissions are sufficient, and the ceiling is reached. When the number of games up to is more than 127, the amount of data is 4 bytes.

The predetermined number can be set arbitrarily, but if the value is 127 or less, the amount of data is 2 bytes, which is preferable. Further, for example, P = the reciprocal of the jackpot probability, and a predetermined number = 0.4 × P may be used. The possibility of hitting within the number of fluctuations of the reciprocal of the jackpot probability multiplied by 0.4 is about 33%. Further, when the effect control device 300 also counts the value corresponding to the normal probability fluctuation number independently of the game control device 100, the predetermined value even if the normal probability fluctuation number is not less than or equal to the predetermined number. Therefore, the game control device 100 may transmit information on the number of normal probability fluctuations to the effect control device 300. This makes it possible to obtain consistency in the values counted by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300.

In step A65, it is determined whether the number of normal probability fluctuations is "0" (step A65), and if the number of normal probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A65; N), the normal probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. do. On the other hand, when the number of normal probability fluctuations becomes "0" (step A65; Y), the initial value (900 in this case) is saved in the normal probability fluctuation number region (step A66). As a result, the measurement of the normal probability fluctuation number (game execution number) is cleared at the start of the chance mode (Public power support) triggered by the arrival of the ceiling number n. It should be noted that the chance mode triggered by the arrival of the ceiling count n in the timing of clearing the measurement of the number of game executions is not limited to the start of the chance mode, and can be changed as appropriate during the chance mode, for example, a chance. It may be at the end of the mode.

Next, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A67), and the initial value for the time reduction ceiling (here, 1) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation frequency area (step A68). When the normal probability fluctuation number update process is the process of step A764, that is, when the result of the ceiling reaching game is per time-saving symbol, the process of step A67 is executed to start the variation (when the stop symbol is set). The time reduction determination data (steps A451 and A491) set in) are cleared, and by executing the process of step A68, the time reduction number N is set as the time reduction fluctuation number (support number). As a result, when the first condition that the number of times the game is executed reaches the number of times of ceiling n and the second condition that the result of the game is per time-saving symbol are satisfied at the same time, the first condition is prioritized.

Next, the signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A69), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned ON). Special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability status signal ON, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened status signal ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension status signal ON) test signal output data area Save to (step A70).

Next, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A71), the normal figure high probability & time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure gate mode flag area (step A72), and the probability state flag is maintained. In order to make the time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A73).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A74), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn it on, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A75).

After that, a ceiling arrival command for notifying the arrival of the ceiling is prepared (step A77), an effect command setting process (step A78) is performed, and the normal probability fluctuation number update process is completed. As a result, the ceiling arrival command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 can be notified of the arrival of the ceiling. The ceiling arrival command is information regarding the fact that the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times. In addition, when the ceiling is reached, it will be in the state with the normal power support without going through the special game state, and the ceiling arrival command will be in the state with the normal power support without going through the special game state (second state). It can also be said to be information about what to do.

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the start of the time saving state based on the arrival of the ceiling in the present embodiment is the game A (t31 to 33) in which the number of normal probability fluctuations becomes 0 at the end of the game and the ceiling is reached. It is the end of. In the game B, the effect related to the arrival of the ceiling is executed, but the ceiling arrival command is transmitted before the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command for the game B are transmitted. As a result, when setting the stop symbol or fluctuation pattern for the game B in which the effect is based on the arrival of the ceiling, it is possible to make the setting in consideration of the arrival of the ceiling, and it is possible to perform an effect without discomfort or contradiction. .. If the ceiling arrival command is sent after the stop symbol command or fluctuation pattern command is sent, the stop symbol or fluctuation pattern will be sent until the ceiling arrival command arrives or after it is confirmed that the ceiling arrival command does not come. Settings must be made, resulting in inefficient control.

It should be noted that the ceiling arrival command is transmitted at the end of the game A that has reached the ceiling, but it is at the start of the game B, which is a game that executes the effect based on the arrival of the ceiling, and the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command. The ceiling arrival command may be sent before the transmission of. In this case, the ceiling arrival command may be earlier or later than the decorative special figure hold number command for notifying the change of the start storage number.

In addition, the probability setting value information may be included in the ceiling arrival command. The information of the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the power is turned on, but is not transmitted other than that. By transmitting the information of the probability set value when the ceiling is reached, the probability set value can be confirmed in the effect control device 300, and accurate processing can be performed in the effect suggesting the probability set value. ..

Further, instead of transmitting the ceiling arrival command, the stop symbol command or the fluctuation pattern command may include information indicating that the ceiling has been reached. Further, as the look-ahead information about the special figure start memory, the information that the special figure change display game (here, game A) based on the special figure start memory is executed to reach the ceiling is transmitted. good. In this case, if there is a special figure start memory that is a big hit before the special figure start memory, the normal probability fluctuation number is reset by the big hit, so the information that the ceiling is reached is not transmitted. You may do so. The information that the game has reached the ceiling or the information that the game has reached the ceiling is the information that the number of times the game has been executed has reached or has reached a predetermined number, or that there is a general electric support without going through a special game state. Information about what was or was to be a state (second state).

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the information on the number of normal probability fluctuations is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the information until the arrival of the ceiling, but the ceiling is not transmitted without the information on the number of normal probability fluctuations. You may want to send the ceiling arrival command only when you reach. In particular, information on the number of normal probability fluctuations is transmitted to the effect control device 300 only when the power is turned on, and then the number of games until the effect control device 300 reaches the ceiling independently of the game control device 100 is counted. In this case, even if the data lost due to the power failure of the effect control device 300 or the counted data is lost due to other troubles, it is possible to grasp that the ceiling has been reached by transmitting the ceiling arrival command.

Further, in the above example, the transmission timing of the ceiling arrival command is set to the end of the game A in which the ceiling is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a predetermined timing during the fluctuation time in the game A that reaches the ceiling, or it may be a transmission timing of the stop command. Predetermined timings during the fluctuation time include the time when reach occurs, the time when the SP reach is developed, and the time when the result mode is temporarily stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), a ceiling arrival command may be transmitted at the start of the game A to reach the ceiling, and the effect based on the arrival of the ceiling may be executed in the game A. In this case, among the normal probability fluctuation number update processes shown in FIG. 32, the processes other than the processes of steps A66 to A75 are performed at the start of the special figure variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation start shown in FIG. Perform the process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process before the process. As a result, the ceiling arrival command is transmitted before the stop symbol command and the fluctuation pattern command for the game A are transmitted.

Further, the processes of steps A65 to A75 are performed at the end of the special figure variation display game so that the normal probability variation frequency is maintained at 0 during the execution of the game A that has reached the ceiling, and a power failure occurs. Even in this case, it is possible to notify the ceiling from the information on the number of normal probability fluctuations.

During the execution of the game A, the effect based on the arrival of the ceiling is being executed, but the time saving state has not yet started. If a power failure occurs during the execution of the game A, the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 300 having no backup function cannot display the effect until the command related to the game is received (until the stop command of t42 is received). Therefore, the power failure recovery screen is displayed. For this reason, the player is worried that the time saving state based on the arrival of the ceiling will not be executed.

Therefore, when it can be confirmed that the normal probability fluctuation number is 0 based on the information of the normal probability fluctuation number command included in the power failure recovery command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery. , A display indicating that the ceiling has been reached may be added to the power failure recovery screen displayed on the display device 41, and the player may be notified that the time saving state based on the arrival of the ceiling is executed. .. Alternatively, a display indicating that the ceiling has been reached may be added in the effect started by receiving the stop command. When the power failure is restored, the game control device 100 transmits information to the effect control device 300 that the game has reached the ceiling, and the player is notified that the game has reached the ceiling based on this information. May be.

Further, in FIG. 33 (b), the effect based on the arrival of the ceiling is started at the start of the game A, but the start timing may be a predetermined timing during the fluctuation time in the game A, and the transmission timing of the stop command may be used. It is also good. Predetermined timings during the fluctuation time include the time when reach occurs, the time when the SP reach is developed, and the time when the result mode is temporarily stopped. When the timing is based on the execution of the reach, the fluctuation pattern including the reach state is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the game A.

From the above, a game in which a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in an integrated manner in a game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player. The control means (game control device 100), the effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the information from the game control means, the closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and the game ball can be easily won. The game control means sets the state of the normal variable winning device 37 to the first state and the second state, which is easier to win than the first state. It is possible to control the state in any of the states, and to set the second state based on the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. , And variation pattern information regarding the execution mode of the game is configured to be transmitted to the effect control means, and when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, it is suggested or notified that the predetermined number of times has been reached. Prior to the transmission of the symbol information and the fluctuation pattern information about the game, the information regarding the fact that the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number (ceiling arrival command) is transmitted to the effect control means.
Therefore, when the effect control device 300 selects the stop symbol or the fluctuation pattern of the game, it can be selected in consideration of reaching the ceiling, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the game control means can store up to a predetermined upper limit of the starting memory that is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball to the ordinary variable winning device 37, and the starting memory information regarding the starting memory at the start of the game. Is configured to be transmitted to the effect control means, and the start storage information is transmitted before the information regarding the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times.
Therefore, even if the ceiling information is transmitted, the display mode of the decorative special figure start storage display that starts the change earliest at the start of the game can be determined first regardless of the transmission of the ceiling information.

In addition, a game control that comprehensively controls a game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The means (game control device 100), the effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the information from the game control means, the closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and the game ball can be easily won. A normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into an open state is provided, and the game control means changes the state of the normal variable winning device 37 into a first state and a second state in which winning is easier than the first state. It is possible to control in any of the states, and the second state can be set based on the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and the result of the game is a predetermined special result among the special results. In the case of, the game started after the end of the special gaming state can be set as the second state, and when the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times has been reached. At the start of the game in which the suggestion or notification of the above is performed, the information regarding the second state without going through the special gaming state is transmitted to the effect control means.
Therefore, in the effect control device 300, the effect and the like can be selected in consideration of reaching the ceiling, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a game control that comprehensively controls a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The means (game control device 100), the effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the information from the game control means, the closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and the game ball can be easily won. A normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into an open state is provided, and the game control means changes the state of the normal variable winning device 37 into a first state and a second state in which winning is easier than the first state. It is possible to control in any of the states, and the second state can be set based on the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and the result of the game is a predetermined special result among the special results. In the case of, the game started after the end of the special game state can be set as the second state, and at the start of the game, the symbol information regarding the result of the game is transmitted to the effect control means. When the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times, information regarding the second state without going through the special gaming state at the start of the game that suggests or notifies that the predetermined number of times has been reached is provided. It is included in the symbol information and transmitted to the effect control means.
Therefore, when the effect control device 300 selects the stop symbol of the game, it can be selected in consideration of reaching the ceiling, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a game control that comprehensively controls a game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The means (game control device 100), the effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the information from the game control means, the closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and the game ball can be easily won. A normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into an open state is provided, and the game control means changes the state of the normal variable winning device 37 into a first state and a second state in which winning is easier than the first state. It is possible to control in any of the states, and the second state can be set based on the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and the result of the game is a predetermined special result among the special results. In the case of, it is possible to set the game started after the end of the special gaming state as the second state, and at the start of the game, the variation pattern information regarding the execution mode of the game is transmitted to the effect control means. When the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times, the second state is set without going through the special gaming state at the start of the game that suggests or notifies that the predetermined number of times has been reached. This means that the information is included in the fluctuation pattern information and transmitted to the effect control means.
Therefore, when the variation pattern is selected in the effect control device 300, it can be selected in consideration of reaching the ceiling, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Support operation setting process]
FIG. 34 shows a support operation setting process (step A742) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this support operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A820). When the time reduction determination data area is not cleared (step A820; N), that is, when the process of step A67 is not executed in the immediately preceding normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A764), the time reduction determination data is used. The corresponding initial value is saved in the time reduction fluctuation frequency region (step A821), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the external information output data region (step A822). That is, when the time saving symbol hit symbol stops, only the signal related to the start of the time saving (for example, the big hit 2 signal is turned ON) is output as an external information signal.
Next, a signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned ON, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned ON. Is ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Next, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A824), the normal figure high probability & time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure gate mode flag area (step A825), and the probability state flag is maintained. In order to make the time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is acquired (step A830). In step A829, the same processing as the setting in the jackpot end processing (step A904) is performed. By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the effect mode transition information, the variation pattern scenario which is the information regarding the migration of the variation selection table group is also acquired.
That is, in the case of hitting the time-saving symbol, the stop symbol, which is the type of the time-saving symbol, is selected by the special symbol random number, and the effect mode transition information is selected based on the stop symbol, and the variation pattern scenario is selected. It will be.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode and managing the variation selection table group in the game control device 100, first, the effect set after the end of the special figure variation display game that is a time-saving symbol. The effect mode number of the mode is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A831). Further, the remaining rotation speed of the effect of the effect mode set after the end of the special figure variation display game that hits the time-saving symbol is acquired and saved in the remaining rotation speed area of the effect (step A832), and the time-saving symbol is hit. The next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the special figure variation display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the production mode and the variation selection table group will shift based on executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special map variation display game that hits the time saving symbol. Become.

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A834), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A835), and the effect command setting process (step A836) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, a command including the information of "time reduction" and the information of the effect mode is set.
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A837), the effect command setting process (step A838) is performed, and the time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is executed. Prepare (step A839) and perform the effect command setting process (step A840).
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A820; Y), that is, when the processes of steps A66 to A78 are executed in the immediately preceding normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A764), immediately before that. Since the process corresponding to steps A821 to A828 has already been executed in the normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A764) of the above, the process proceeds to the process of step A829 without performing the process of steps A821 to A828. As a result, when the first condition that the number of times the game is executed reaches the number of ceilings and the second condition that the result of the game hits the time-saving symbol are satisfied at the same time, the first condition is prioritized. In addition, when the first condition is satisfied, the number of time reduction fluctuations (the number of supports) may be given more than when the second condition is satisfied. In that case, the first condition may be applied. By giving priority, the player who is more advantageous to the player will be selected, and the interest of the game will be enhanced.

As described above, the game control means (game control device 100) can start the second state (the state with the universal power support) based on the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of ceilings).
Therefore, based on the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, the state of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes an advantageous state for the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. That is, since the second state occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, a new transition different from the transition of the conventional gaming state becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) can start the second state (state with normal electric support) when the first condition that the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of ceilings) is satisfied. The second state can be started when the second condition that the result of the game is a specific result (per time saving symbol) different from the special result is satisfied, and the first condition and the second condition in one game can be started. If both of the above are satisfied, the second state based on the establishment of the first condition is started.

Therefore, in the same special figure fluctuation display game, if the Fuden support based on reaching the ceiling and the Fuden support based on the time saving symbol are activated in duplicate, the Fuden based on reaching the ceiling is activated. Since support is prioritized, the control process can be simplified. That is, by giving priority to the normal electric support based on reaching the ceiling, it is possible to standardize the normal probability fluctuation number update process in step A764 and the normal probability change number update process in step A765. The control burden can be reduced.
If both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one game, the second state based on the satisfaction of the second condition may be started. That is, in the same special figure fluctuation display game, if the Fuden support based on reaching the ceiling and the Fuden support based on the time saving symbol hit are activated in duplicate, the Fuden support based on the time saving symbol hit is activated. May be prioritized. Further, when the second condition is satisfied, the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of supports) may be given more than when the first condition is satisfied. In that case, the second condition may be applied. By giving priority, the player who is more advantageous to the player will be selected, and the interest of the game will be enhanced.

Further, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one game, which of the first condition and the second condition is prioritized may be selected each time. For example, the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of support) given may be compared each time, and the one with the larger number may be prioritized. Specifically, for example, the number of times of support given when the first condition that the number of times the game is executed reaches the number of times of ceiling is satisfied is "200 times", and the result of the game is A per time saving symbol. The number of times of support given when the two conditions are satisfied is "100 times", and the number of times of support given when the second condition that the result of the game is B per time saving symbol is satisfied is "300 times". In the gaming machine, if both the first condition and the second condition of A per time saving symbol are satisfied in one game, the first condition is given priority, and the first condition and the second condition of B per time saving symbol are satisfied in one game. If both of the two conditions are satisfied, the second condition may be given priority. With this configuration, the player who is more advantageous to the player is selected, so that the interest of the game is enhanced.

[Big hit end processing]
FIG. 35 shows a jackpot end process (step A15) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this jackpot end process, first, the time reduction determination data set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of this special game state is in a time-saving state (state with normal power support) after the end of the special game state. ), It is determined whether the data has a time reduction set (step A901).
If the data does not have a time reduction (step A901; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A902), and if the data has a time reduction (step A901; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). .. Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A904), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is acquired (step A905). The effect mode transition information also includes a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the migration of the variation selection table group.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode and managing the variation selection table group in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired. And save it in the effect mode number area (step A906). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A907), and the mode shifts to the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A908). Based on the information saved here, the effect mode and the variation selection table group will shift based on executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state.

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A909), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A910), and the effect command setting process (step A911) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including information on the effect mode in either "with time reduction" or "without time reduction".
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A912), and the effect command setting process (step A913) is performed.
Next, a time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A914), and an effect command setting process (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (step A916), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A917).
After that, the signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal is turned off, the big hit 3 signal is turned off, and the big hit 4 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A918), and the signal related to the end of the big hit (for example). , The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Subsequently, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot is cleared (step A921), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot end process is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 36A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A931). Next, the signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off. Is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A933), the low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A934), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the no time saving flag to (step A935). After that, the time reduction fluctuation frequency region is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, there is no time reduction (state without normal power support). Further, by setting the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (here, 1) in the time reduction fluctuation number region, the time reduction state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (here, once).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 36B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A941). Since the signal related to the start of high probability is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form. Next, a signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned ON, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned ON. Is ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A942).

Next, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A943), the normal figure high probability & time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A944), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the time saving flag (step A945). After that, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (here, 1) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number region (step A946), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the time is shortened (the state with the normal electric support). Further, by setting the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (here, 1) in the time reduction fluctuation number region, the time reduction state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (here, once). In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the big hit end setting processes 1 and 2 do not make the right-handed setting.
That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period for opening the normal variable winning device 37 is extended for a predetermined period. It serves as a state generation control means.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 37 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the cross key 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the cross key 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, the effect content is changed. ..

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, the sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and the LED control of the frame decoration device 18 including the board decoration device 46 and the display board 350 are performed. The WDT is cleared by performing the decoration control process (step C18), the movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44, and the board effect setting process (step C20) that controls the effect. The process returns to the process (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 38 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to the process of step C204. When it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 39 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that the MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, a normal probability fluctuation count command, and a ceiling arrival command. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be used. It is a production such as performing a production display. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-reading are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variable display game.

Next, an example of the progress and production of the game will be described. FIG. 40 shows an example of the progress of the game after the big hit occurs.
First, when the first special gaming state ends, the first specific gaming state ST4 is set and the special figure variation display game is started (t11). In this example, even when a big hit occurs in the normal game state ST1, there is still no second start memory and the first start memory exists, so that the special figure 1 variable display game is started. There is.

The variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game executed for the first time after the end of the first special gaming state ST2 is set to be sufficient time for the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened a plurality of times in the normal electric support. The time is sufficient for the second start memory to occur. Regarding the special figure variable display game that is executed for the first time after the end of the first special game state ST2, the normal variable winning device 37 in the general electric support is opened in both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Sufficient time to run multiple times. The length of this fluctuation time is, for example, at least twice the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game. Further, this fluctuation time is longer than the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game from the end of the first special gaming state ST2 in the specific gaming state to the second and subsequent times. Further, the variation time (t11 to t12) of the special figure variation display game executed for the first time in the first specific gaming state ST4 after the end of the first special game state ST2 is the second start generated in the special figure variation display game. The time is longer than the fluctuation time (t13 to t14, etc.) of the special figure 2 variation display game based on the memory.

When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the normal electric support ends (t12), and when the stop time for displaying the result ends, the special figure 1 variable display game ends (t13). Since only one game will be supported by Fuden after the end of the first special game state, Fuden support will end in this special figure variation display game. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the Fuden support is terminated at the end of the variable time, but the Fuden support may be terminated at the end of the special figure variation display game.
In this example, since the second start memory is generated, the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the special figure 1 variable display game ends (t13). In this special figure 2 variable display game, the result is a time-saving symbol, and after the variable time ends and the result is stopped and displayed (t14), the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the public electric support is provided. Is started, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started by the second start memory (t15).

The result of this special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, and the second special gaming state ST3 is reached by the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t17). In addition, since only one game is supported by the time-saving symbol, the normal power support ends when the variable time of this special figure 2 variable display game ends (t16). As a result, in the second special game state ST3, there is no general electric support.

After the end of the second special game state ST3, the special figure 2 variable display game is started based on the second start memory (t18). In this special figure 2 variable display game, the result is a time-saving symbol, and after the variable time ends and the result is stopped and displayed (t19), the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the Fuden support Is started, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started by the second start memory (t20). Since only one game is supported by the time-saving symbol, the special figure 2 variable display game ends when the variable time of this special figure 2 variable display game ends (t21), but this special figure 2 variable display game is Since the result was a time-saving symbol, the Fuden support is resumed with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t22).

Then, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, and the second special gaming state ST3 is reached by the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t24). In addition, since only one game is supported by the time-saving symbol, the normal power support ends with the end of the variable time of this special figure 2 variable display game (t23). As a result, in the second special game state ST3, there is no general electric support. In this way, small hits occur frequently, which increases the number of balls held by the player.

This first specific game state ST4 ends when the special figure variation display game which is a miss or a small hit is continuous, a new second start memory cannot be generated, and all the second start memory is digested. Further, although it ends by deriving the big hit, in the case of a big hit with support, the first specific gaming state ST4 is newly started after the end of the first special gaming state ST2.

In the above-described execution mode, the general electric support by the time-saving symbol hit is started by the end of the special symbol variation display game (t15, t20, t22, t26), and the special figure hits the time-saving symbol. The next special figure of the variable display game ends at the end timing of the variable time of the variable display game (t16, t21, t23). Here, when the time saving symbol hits are continuous (t20 to t23), the general electric support ends at the end timing of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game (t21), and the end timing of the same special figure fluctuation display game. The public service support will start at (t22). In this case, the time-reduced fluctuation number update process (step A612) that can terminate the Fuden support in the special figure changing process executed earlier is performed, and the Fuden support is performed in the special figure display process executed later. The support operation setting process (step A742) capable of starting the above is performed. As a result, new Fuden support will be started after the Fuden support ends. For this reason, there is no Fuden support for the period of the stop display time, but the execution mode is substantially the same as that of the continuous Fuden support.

By doing the above, when the end and start of the Fuden support occur in the same special figure fluctuation display game, first the Fuden support should be terminated and then a new Fuden support should be started. It is possible to reliably start the Fuden support without the situation where a new Fuden support is started while the Fuden support is being executed. In particular, if the setting is such that the Fuden support cannot be started by hitting a new time-saving symbol when the Fuden support is still available, the end and start of the Fuden support are the same. If the end processing of the Fuden support is performed after the start processing of the Fuden support, the Fuden support by the time saving symbol cannot be started. However, by performing the termination process of the Fuden support before the start processing of the Fuden support as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to reliably start the Fuden support by hitting the time-saving symbol.

Next, the production of the game will be described. FIG. 41A shows an example of the display mode of the display device 41 in the normal gaming state ST1. As shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81 for displaying the first decorative game of the decorative special figure variation display games is provided. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. At the lower right of the display area, a second decoration game display unit 82 for displaying the second decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 82 is the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81. After the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, it is stopped and the result is displayed.

Further, in the lower center of the display area, a storage display unit 83 for displaying the decorative special drawing start storage display corresponding to the start storage is provided. Of the first start memory and the second start memory, the memory display unit 83 displays information on the start memory corresponding to the main special figure variation display game corresponding to the game state. It should be noted that the information about both start-up memories may be displayed at all times. Here, since it is a normal gaming state, the information of the first start memory is displayed. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the memory display unit 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the order of memory. Here, it is indicated that there are three first start memories. Shows. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

On the left side of the storage display unit 83, an execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the storage display unit 83 is transferred to the running storage display unit 84, and the result, variation pattern, etc. of the special figure variation display game to be executed are transferred. Is suggested by the display mode.

A start storage number display unit 85 for displaying the start storage number is provided in the upper left portion of the display area. The start storage number display unit 85 is provided with a first start storage number display unit 85a for displaying the number of first start storages and a second start storage number display unit 85b for displaying the number of second start storages. ing.
Below the start storage number display unit 85, an effect mode display unit 644 that displays the current effect mode is provided. Here, a "normal stage" is displayed, which indicates that the mode is the normal mode, which is the effect mode corresponding to the normal game state ST1.
Further, in the upper right portion of the display area, a game number display unit 645 for displaying the number of executed games counted for managing the arrival of the ceiling corresponding to the number of normal probability fluctuations is provided. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of games reaching the ceiling is 900 games, and FIG. 41 (a) shows that 800 games have been executed. The number of games display unit 645 may be displayed regardless of the number of executed games, or may be displayed when the number of executed games is a predetermined number or more (for example, 800 games or more).

As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the variation time ends, the result mode is displayed, the special figure variation display game ends, and the next special figure variation display game starts as shown in FIG. 41 (c). As a result, the decorative special figure start storage display of the storage display unit 83 decreases in response to the decrease in the start storage number, and the display of the start storage number display unit 85 is also updated. In addition, the display of the game number display unit 645 is also updated. Then, when the special result is derived as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the first special gaming state is set as shown in FIG. 41 (e).

Hereinafter, a case where the game progresses as shown in FIG. 40 will be described as an example. When the ending of the first special gaming state is executed as shown in FIG. 41 (f) and the first special gaming state ends, the special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 41 (g) (FIG. 40). T11). Here, since there is no second start memory and only the first start memory exists, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The derived special result is a big hit with support, and with the end of the first special gaming state, the first specific gaming state is set and the production mode becomes the chance mode. The effect mode display unit 644 displays a "chance stage" indicating that the mode is a chance mode.

Further, since the special figure 2 variation display game is the main special figure variation display game in the first specific game state, the information of the second start memory is displayed on the storage display unit 83. Here, since there is no second start memory and only the first start memory exists, the decorative special figure start memory display is not displayed on the storage display unit 83. In addition, the running storage display unit 84 displays a display corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the special figure variable display game being executed.

As shown in FIG. 41 (h), when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends, the stop display time for displaying the result is set (t12 in FIG. 40). Here, the result of the deviation is displayed as a result. Further, four second start memories are generated during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display is displayed on the storage display unit 83. The display of the effect mode display unit 644 does not change because the game state is still the first specific game state ST4 and the effect mode is also the chance mode, although the normal electric support ends with the end of the variable time.
Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (i), the next special figure variation display game is started without the normal electric support, but the game state is still the first specific game state ST4, and the production mode is a chance. Since the mode is left as it is, the display of the effect mode display unit 644 does not change (t13 in FIG. 40).

After that, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), the result per time-saving symbol is derived (t14 in FIG. 40). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the result mode per time-saving symbol in the decorative special figure variation display game is set to "321". With the end of the stop display time as a result, the public electric support is started, and the next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 42 (b) (t15 in FIG. 40). In this case as well, since the gaming state remains the first specific gaming state ST4 and the effect mode remains the chance mode, the display of the effect mode display unit 644 does not change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the result of the small hit is derived (t16 in FIG. 40). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the result mode of the small hit in the decorative special figure variation display game is "123". Although the general electric support ends with the end of the variable time, the display of the effect mode display unit 644 does not change because the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the effect mode remains the chance mode.

With the end of the stop display time as a result, the second special gaming state based on the small hit is started (t17 in FIG. 40). During the execution of this second special gaming state, the state in which the result mode of the small hit is displayed is maintained as shown in FIG. 42 (c). Although the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the display of the effect mode display unit 644 maintains the same display as in the case of the chance mode. As a result, the player is not made aware that he / she is in the second special gaming state. Of course, the effect may be executed as a small hit mode corresponding to the small hit.

When the second special gaming state is completed, the next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 42 (d) (t18 in FIG. 40). While this special figure variation display game is being executed, there is no normal power support, but the game state is still the first specific game state ST4 and the effect mode is the chance mode, so the effect mode display unit 644 The display of is unchanged. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (e), the result per time-saving symbol is derived (t19 in FIG. 40), and when the stop display time of the result ends, the normal electric support is started, and is shown in FIG. 42 (f). As described above, the next special figure variation display game is started (t20 in FIG. 40). In this case as well, since the gaming state remains the first specific gaming state ST4 and the effect mode remains the chance mode, the display of the effect mode display unit 644 does not change.

When the variation time of this special figure variation display game ends, the result per time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (g). The Fuden support ends with the end of this fluctuation time (t21 in Fig. 40), but since the result is per time-saving symbol, the Fuden support starts with the end of the stop display time of the result (t22 in Fig. 40). , The next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 42 (h) (t22 in FIG. 40). Even in this process, the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the effect mode remains the chance mode, so that the display of the effect mode display unit 644 does not change.
Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (i), the result of the small hit is derived (t23 in FIG. 40). The Fuden support ends with the derivation of the result due to the end of the variable time, but the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the effect mode remains the chance mode, so the display of the effect mode display unit 644 Does not change.

As described above, in the first specific game state ST4 and the second special game state ST3, until the normal game state ST1 is returned or the first special game state ST2 is reached, the normal electric support is terminated, started, or a small hit. Even if there is a start or end of the second special game state based on it, the production of the chance mode is maintained. That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute an effect (effect of chance mode) suggesting that the state of the normal variable winning device 37 is the second state (state with normal electric support). .. Therefore, since it is possible to suggest (notify) to the player that the state of the normal variable winning device 37 is advantageous for the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Then, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can continue the effect suggesting that it is in the second state (effect of chance mode) even after the second state ends. Specifically, when the second state (state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4) ends and the state shifts to the state ST42 of the first specific game state ST4 (when the effect mode remains the chance mode) or , In the case of shifting to the second special game state ST3 (when the display of the effect mode display unit 644 is maintained in the same display as in the chance mode), even if the second state ends, it is the second state. It is possible to continue the production that suggests that (the production of chance mode).
As a result, it is possible to suggest (notify) that the advantageous period for the player continues for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it becomes easy to understand that the first specific gaming state is an advantageous period for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game in the first specific gaming state.

FIG. 43 shows another example of the production. In this example, a support status display unit 646 for displaying the status of the normal electric support is provided. Also in this example, the case where the game progresses as shown in FIG. 40 will be described as an example.
When the first special game state ends, the special figure fluctuation display game is started with the normal power support, and as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the support status display unit 646 has the normal power support. The characters and characters of "Supporting !!" are displayed (t11 in FIG. 40). As shown in FIG. 43 (b), when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the normal power support ends, and the display of the support status display unit 646 indicates that there is no normal power support. "Medium" characters and characters are displayed (t12 in FIG. 40).

As shown in FIG. 43 (c), the next special figure variation display game is executed without the normal power support (t13 in FIG. 40), and the support status display unit 646 is displayed even during the execution of this special figure variation display game. Is displayed as "Waiting for support" characters and characters. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the result per time-saving symbol is derived (t14 in FIG. 40), and as shown in FIG. 43 (e), the stop display time of the special figure variation display game ends and the next When the special figure fluctuation display game of No. 1 is started, the Fuden support is started (t15 in FIG. 40).
With the start of this Fuden support, the support status display unit 646 displays the characters and characters of "Support Revival !!" for a certain period of time as a start effect to notify the start of the Fuden support, and then FIG. 43 (f). As shown in, the characters and characters of "Supporting !!" are displayed to indicate that there is a public service support.

As shown in FIG. 43 (g), since the normal electric support ends when the variable display ends, the display of the support status display unit 646 becomes the character display and the character display of "waiting for support" (t16 in FIG. 40). Here, the result is a small hit and it becomes the second special game state, but since there is no normal electric support even during this second special game state, the display of the support status display unit 646 is a character display of "waiting for support". And the character display is maintained. As shown in FIG. 43 (h), the next special figure variation display game is started after the end of the second special gaming state (t18 in FIG. 40). Since this special figure variation display game is in a state where there is no normal electric support, the display of the support status display unit 646 maintains the character display and the character display of "waiting for support".

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (i), the result per time-saving symbol is derived (t19 in FIG. 40), and as shown in FIG. 43 (j), the stop display time of the special figure variation display game ends and the next When the special figure fluctuation display game of No. 1 is started, the Fuden support is started (t20 in FIG. 40). With the start of this Fuden support, the support status display unit 646 displays the characters "Support is back !!" and the characters for a certain period of time, and then displays the characters "Supporting !!" and the characters. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (k), the display of the support status display unit 646 becomes the character display and the character display of "waiting for support" due to the end of the normal power support (t21 in FIG. 40), and the start of the normal power support. As shown in FIG. 43 (l), in the support status display unit 646, the character display and the character display of "support is restored !!" are performed for a certain period of time (t22 in FIG. 40) as a start effect, and then "supporting !!" Character display and character display are made.

In this way, by notifying the status of the normal electric support by the support status display unit 646, the player has doubts that the normal variable winning device 37 does not operate despite the first specific gaming status ST4. Can be prevented. In addition, every time the Fuden support is started due to the time saving symbol, the player can be satisfied with the acquisition of the Fuden support, and the interest of the game can be improved.
That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a second state effect (for example, "supporting !!" in the support state display unit 646) as an effect (chance mode effect) suggesting that the second state is in effect. Character display and character display), second state start effect (for example, effect of displaying the character and character of "Support Revival !!" on the support state display unit 646), and second state standby effect (for example). It is possible to execute the effect of displaying characters and characters of "waiting for support" on the support status display unit 646).
Therefore, in addition to the second state (the state with the normal electric support), the second state starts, and the period that is not the second state but is advantageous for the player (the first specific game state ST4 or the second state). Since it is possible to suggest (notify) that the game is in the special game state ST3), it is possible to prevent the player from having doubts and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the start effect (second state start effect) is started at the same time as the start of the Fuden support, it may be performed prior to the start of the Fuden support. For example, the start effect (second state start effect) may be performed at the stop display time in which the result mode of the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed.
Further, the start effect (second state start effect) is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), even if the number of games in which the normal electric support is provided is added. good.

Further, in the first specific gaming state ST4, it may be difficult to distinguish from the result mode by assuming that the result mode of the small hit and the time-saving symbol hit in the decorative special figure variation display game is common to the result mode of the loss. By doing so, it is possible to concentrate on the flow mode of the game ball in the game area 32 on the right side without worrying about the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
That is, it includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on information from the game control means, and a display device 41 that can display information about the game, and the effect control means corresponds to the game. The display device 41 is configured to display the decoration game, and among the result modes of the decoration game, a part or all of the result mode of the small hit and the result mode of the specific result may be a common result mode. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a small hit and a specific result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this case, a notification effect for notifying whether the hit is a small hit or a time-saving symbol hit may be performed. As this notification effect, for example, after deriving a result mode commonly used for small hits, time-saving symbol hits, and misses as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the characters fight as shown in FIG. 44 (c). , As shown in FIG. 44 (d), if one character wins, it indicates that it is a time saving symbol hit, and as shown in FIG. 44 (e), if the other character wins, it indicates that it is a small hit. To. This notification effect may be performed within the stop display time, may be performed during the fluctuation time, or may be performed over the fluctuation time and the stop display time.
That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) notifies whether the result of the game is a small hit (second special result among the special results) or a time-saving symbol hit (specific result different from the special result). It is possible to execute the notification effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 44 (b) to (e)). Therefore, it is possible to clearly notify which of the second special game state and the second state (the state with the normal electric support), so that the interest of the game can be improved. It is also possible to execute this notification effect as an effect (effect of the chance mode) suggesting that the state is the second state.

From the above, the game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is comprehensively controlled in the game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player. A game control means (game control device 100), and a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be easily won. Controls the state of the normal variable winning device 37 in either the first state (without Fuden support) or the second state (with Fuden support), which is easier to win than the first state. If the condition for the second state is satisfied, the next game is set to the second state.
Therefore, it can be set to the first state during the small hit game state, the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device can be prevented from opening at the same time, and the winning device to be aimed at becomes clear and the interest of the game. Can be improved.

Further, a start winning opening 36 in which a game ball can be won is provided, and the game control means determines a first starting memory which is an execution right of the first game of the game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. It is possible to store up to the upper limit number, and it is possible to store up to the predetermined upper limit number of the second start memory which is the execution right of the second game of the game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37. When the start memory is configured to be digested with priority over the first start memory, and a big hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device is derived as a special result, a big hit game state is generated as a special game state, and the game When the result is a predetermined jackpot among the jackpots, the game started after the end of the special gaming state is set as the second state, and in the second game, the small hit without the operation of the conditional device is performed as a special result. It means that the probability of being derived is higher than the probability of deriving the jackpot or missed result.
Therefore, in the second game, small hits occur frequently, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the result of the game is a specific result (per time saving symbol) different from the special result, the next game is set as the second state without generating the special game state, and in the second game, the specific result is obtained. It means that the probability of being derived is higher than the probability of deriving the jackpot or missed result.
Therefore, in the second game, the specific result becomes frequent, the period in which the second state is reached can be secured, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a game is executed in which the identification information is variablely displayed and the result is stopped and displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the game is controlled in a game machine that generates a special game state when the result of the game becomes a special result. It is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won. The game control means controls the state of the normal variable winning device 37 in either a first state or a second state in which winning is easier than the first state, and in one game, When the condition for ending the second state and the condition for starting the second state are satisfied, the process of ending the second state is performed before the process of starting the second state. Become.
Therefore, it is possible to start a new second state after ending the second state, and the control process can be simplified.

Further, the game control means can start the second state without generating the special game state when the result of the game is a specific result different from the special result, and in the game which is the specific result. When the condition for ending the second state is satisfied, the process for ending the second state is performed before the process for starting the second state.
Therefore, it is possible to start a new second state after ending the second state, and the control process can be simplified.

Further, when the condition for ending the second state is satisfied in the game that results in the specific result, the game control means ends the second state with the end of the variation display of the game, and the result in the game is stopped. It means that the second state is started at the end of the display.
Therefore, it is possible to start a new second state after ending the second state, and the control process can be simplified.

In the above-described embodiment, when the condition for the second state is satisfied, that is, when a big hit with support, a time-saving symbol hit is derived, or when the ceiling is reached, only the next game is set as the second state. However, the second state may be set not only for the next game but also for a plurality of games. Further, the number of games to be in the second state may be different depending on the type of the condition for the second state to be established.
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of deriving a small hit and the probability of deriving a time-saving symbol hit are set to be higher than the probability of deriving a big hit or a missed result, but the missed result in this case. The probability that is derived may be 0 or not.
Further, the probability of deriving a small hit and the probability of deriving a time-saving symbol hit may be at least higher than the probability of deriving a big hit, or at least the missed result is derived. It may be set to be higher than the probability of being obtained, or it may be set to be higher than the probability of synthesizing the probability that the jackpot is derived and the probability that the result is derived.

Further, the game control means can set the execution time of the game, and in the first game state (normal game state ST1) in which the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) is mainly executed, the second state (Public support). When the condition of (presence state) is satisfied, the second state is started and the game shifts to the second game state (first specific game state ST4) in which the second game (special figure 2 variable display game) is mainly executed. The execution time of the first game, which is the first game executed in the second game state, is set to be longer than the execution time of the game executed after the first game in the second game state. It becomes.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably generate the second start memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a game control that comprehensively controls a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. Means (game control device 100), a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and a starting winning opening in which the game ball can be won. 36, and the game control means can store up to a predetermined upper limit of the first start memory, which is the execution right of the first game of the game, based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36. Based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting memory, which is the right to execute the second game of the game, can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the second starting memory is stored from the first starting memory. The state of the normal variable winning device 37 is changed to the first state (without Fuden support) and the second state (with Fuden support), which is easier to win than the first state. When a big hit with the operation of the condition device is derived as a special result, a big hit game state is generated as a special game state, and the result of the game is out of the big hits. In the case of a predetermined big hit, the game started after the end of the special gaming state is set as the second state, and in the second game, the probability that a small hit without the operation of the conditional device is derived as a special result is determined. The variable time of the game that is first executed after the end of the special gaming state based on the predetermined jackpot, which is higher than the probability that the jackpot or missed result is derived, is such that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened a plurality of times. It means that the time is required.
Therefore, the second start memory can be reliably generated at the start of the second state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a game control that comprehensively controls a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. Means (game control device 100), a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and a starting winning opening in which the game ball can be won. 36, and the game control means can store up to a predetermined upper limit of the first start memory, which is the execution right of the first game of the game, based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36. Based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting memory, which is the right to execute the second game of the game, can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the second starting memory is stored from the first starting memory. The state of the normal variable winning device 37 is changed to the first state (without Fuden support) and the second state (with Fuden support), which is easier to win than the first state. When a big hit with the operation of the condition device is derived as a special result, a big hit game state is generated as a special game state, and the result of the game is out of the big hits. In the case of a predetermined big hit, the game started after the end of the special gaming state is set as the second state, and in the second game, the probability that a small hit without the operation of the conditional device is derived as a special result is determined. The variation time of the game that is higher than the probability that the jackpot or miss result is derived and is executed first after the end of the special gaming state based on the predetermined jackpot is the variation time of the game based on the second start memory generated in the game. Will be longer than.
Therefore, the second start memory can be reliably generated at the start of the second state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, a game control that comprehensively controls a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. Means (game control device 100), a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and a starting winning opening in which the game ball can be won. 36, and the game control means can store up to a predetermined upper limit of the first start memory, which is the execution right of the first game of the game, based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36. Based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting memory, which is the right to execute the second game of the game, can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the second starting memory is stored from the first starting memory. The state of the normal variable winning device 37 is changed to the first state (without Fuden support) and the second state (with Fuden support), which is easier to win than the first state. When a big hit with the operation of the condition device is derived as a special result, a big hit game state is generated as a special game state, and the result of the game is out of the big hits. In the case of a predetermined big hit, a specific gaming state including a period to be set as the second state after the end of the special gaming state is set for a predetermined period, and in the second game, as a special result, a small amount without operation of the condition device is performed. The probability that a hit will be derived is higher than the probability that a jackpot or missed result will be derived, and it will be the second state in the game that is first executed in the specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state based on the predetermined jackpot. The fluctuation time of the game is longer than the fluctuation time of the second and subsequent games in the specific gaming state.
Therefore, the second start memory can be reliably generated at the start of the second state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the game control means maintains the second game state when the second start memory exists even when the condition of the first state is satisfied in the second game state (first specific game state ST4). It means that it was done.
Therefore, if the second start memory exists, the second state may be reached again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by preventing frequent transitions of the game state and making the game easy to understand.

In the first specific gaming state ST4, for the special figure variation display game that is executed for the first time after the end of the first special gaming state ST2, the normal variation winning device 37 in the general electric support is opened a plurality of times. Although the time is sufficient, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game other than this may be sufficient time for the normal fluctuation prize device 37 to be opened a plurality of times in the Fuden support. For example, for a special figure variation display game started in a state where the number of second start storages is a predetermined number or less, the second start is set by setting a sufficient time for the normal variation winning device 37 to be opened a plurality of times. It is possible to prevent the memory from being lost and the specific game state from ending early. In addition, for the special figure variation display game that is executed for the first time after the transition to the first specific gaming state ST4 due to the winning of the time-saving symbol or the arrival of the ceiling, the normal variation winning device 37 in the Fuden support is opened multiple times. Make sure you have enough time to do so.

Further, in the first specific gaming state ST4, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game with the normal power support may be longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game without the normal power support. By doing so, the second start memory is likely to occur, and it is possible to prevent the specific game state from ending early due to the loss of the second start memory.

In addition, if the conditions for starting Fuden support are met, only the following special figure fluctuation display games will be in the state of having Fuden support, but if the conditions for starting Fuden support are met, there will be more than one. The special figure fluctuation display game may be set to have the normal electric support, and the general electric support may be terminated according to the derivation of the small hit result. In addition, the Fuden support may be terminated with the start of the second special gaming state.

In addition, after the end of the first special game state, it will be in a state where there is a normal power support for multiple special figure fluctuation display games, and with the derivation of each time-saving symbol, only the next special figure fluctuation display game will have a normal power support. You may overwrite the number of games that support Fuden so that it is in the state.

In addition, for the special figure 2 variable display game, the probability of hitting a small hit and the probability of hitting a time-saving symbol are almost the same, but even if the probability of hitting a time-saving symbol is higher than the probability of hitting a small hit. good. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the second start memory from being lost and the specific gaming state from ending early. Further, the probability of hitting a time-saving symbol may be lower than the probability of hitting a small hit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific gaming state from continuing for a long period of time. In addition, the deviation result may be included in the special figure 2 variable display game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific gaming state from continuing for a long period of time. That is, the length of the duration of the specific gaming state can be designed by changing the ratio of the time-saving symbol hit, the small hit, and the miss of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, in the first specific gaming state ST4, it may be suggested or notified that the specific gaming state ends based on the look-ahead information about the start memory. The specific game state ends mainly when the second start memory is completely digested without increasing due to the continuous small hits. Therefore, it is suggested or notified that the small hits occur continuously by the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed corresponding to the starting memory or other displays, and it is suggested or notified that the specific game state ends. It is possible to do.

In addition, the specific game state ends when a big hit occurs. Therefore, the suggestion that the above-mentioned small hits occur continuously and the suggestion that the big hits occur may be executed in the same manner. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the end of the specific game state may be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

That is, a pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining a random number before the game corresponding to the start memory is executed is provided, and the effect control means can execute a look-ahead effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means. Therefore, when the pre-reading results for all the second start memories currently stored are out of order or small hits, the specific effect can be executed.
Further, when the pre-reading result for the second start memory is a big hit, the specific effect can be executed.

Further, in the first specific game state ST4, when the special figure variation display game executed in the state where there is no normal electric support and the second start memory is not a small hit, the special figure variation display game ends. However, the special figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit in the specific game state, may be executed in the same manner. By doing so, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the end of the specific game state may be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, the same reach effect may be executed in the special figure variation display game that is a small hit and the special figure variation display game that is a big hit in a specific gaming state. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation display game that is a small hit and the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit in the specific gaming state, the special figure fluctuation display other than the special figure fluctuation display game that is first performed in the specific gaming state is displayed. The fluctuation time may be longer than the fluctuation time in the game.

Further, in the first specific gaming state ST4, when small hits are continuously generated, the number of consecutive small hits is shown, and the color and display of the background and identification information are displayed according to the continuous number of small hits. By changing the aspect, it may be suggested that the specific gaming state is likely to end. In addition, the possibility that the specific gaming state may end may be suggested by changing the color and display mode of the background and the identification information according to the number of second start storages.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, it may be a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the order of winning, or a gaming machine that can simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. There may be.
Further, although the special figure probability is always constant, it is possible to shift from the low probability state to the high probability state higher than the low probability state based on the occurrence of a specific big hit (probability variation big hit). The period of high probability state may be until the next big hit, or the period of high probability state may be a so-called ST machine in which the predetermined number of games after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation big hit is set.

Further, the stop display time in the special figure variation display game in which the condition for ending the Fuden support is satisfied may be longer than the stop display time in other special figure variation display games. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to know that the Fuden support has ended. Other special figure fluctuation display games are a special figure fluctuation display game in a state where there is no normal electric support such as the normal game state ST1, and a special figure which is executed in the first specific game state ST4 without the normal electric support. Examples include the figure variable display game and the special figure variable display game in which the normal electric support continues in the next game when it is possible to have the normal electric support over a plurality of games. Further, a special figure variation display game that is a big hit and a special figure variation display game that is a small hit may be included.

In particular, it is effective when both the condition for ending and the condition for starting the Fuden support are satisfied in one special figure variation display game, and the condition and the start of the Fuden support in the one special figure variation display game. Only the stop display time when both of the conditions to be satisfied may be satisfied may be longer than the other stop display times.
In this case, the stop display time is preferably longer than the execution time of the normal map variation display game. Further, it is more preferable that the time is longer than the total time of the execution time of the normal fluctuation display game and the time when the normal fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened.

Further, the stop display time in the special figure variation display game in which the condition for ending the Fuden support is satisfied may be shorter than the stop display time in other special figure variation display games. In particular, only the stop display time when both the condition for ending and the condition for starting the Fuden support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game is made shorter than the stop display time in the other special figure fluctuation display games. Is also good. As a result, the period during which there is no Fuden support (stop display time) is shortened, and it is possible to give the impression that the Fuden support is continuous.

In addition, regarding launch direction instructions such as right-handed notification to instruct right-handed and left-handed notification to instruct left-handed, right-handed notification is continued when there is no general electric support in the first specific game state ST4. You may do so, or you may not perform right-handed notification or left-handed notification.
In particular, during the period when there is no normal power support temporarily (here, the stop display time) when both the condition for ending and the condition for starting the normal power support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game. Although there is no normal power support, the right-handed notification may be continuously performed, or neither the right-handed notification nor the left-handed notification may be performed.

Further, when the support status display unit 646 is provided as shown in FIG. 43, if the display of the support status display unit 646 is set to indicate that there is a normal electric support, right-handed notification is performed. If the display of the support status display unit 646 is a display indicating that there is no normal electric support, the right-handed notification may not be performed. Further, regardless of the display of the support status display unit 646, in the case of the first specific gaming state ST4 or the second special gaming state ST3, the right-handed notification may be continuously performed.

In addition, the timing when the Fuden support ends is set as the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game where the Fuden support start condition is satisfied is stopped, but any timing after the Fuden support end condition is satisfied. However, it may be after the start of the next special figure variation display game.
In addition, the timing when the Fuden support starts is set as the timing when the special figure fluctuation display game in which the start condition of the Fuden support is satisfied is finished, but any timing may be used after the start condition of the Fuden support is satisfied. It may be after the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game.
However, if both the condition for ending the Fuden support and the condition for starting the Fuden support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game started with the Fuden support, the end timing of the Fuden support Make it first.

In addition, the time-reduced fluctuation number update process (step A612) that can terminate the normal electric support is the normal probability fluctuation number update process (steps A762, A764, A765) that can start the normal probability change number based on reaching the ceiling. ) Is done before. As a result, new Fuden support will be started after the Fuden support ends.
However, the time-reduced fluctuation frequency update process (step A612) that can terminate the Fukuden support is the normal probability fluctuation number update process (steps A762, A764, A765) that can start the Fudoden support based on reaching the ceiling. ) May be done later. In this case, the remaining number of games of the remaining Fuden support and the number of games of the remaining Fuden support given by reaching the ceiling may be set, whichever is larger, or the remaining number of the remaining Fuden support games may be set. Regardless of the number of games, the number of games of Fuden support given by reaching the ceiling may be set, or the number of remaining games of Fuden support remaining and the games of Fuden support given by reaching the ceiling may be set. You may set the number of games including the number of games.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has both a small hit symbol (result mode of small hit) and a time-saving symbol per symbol (result mode of time-saving symbol).

FIG. 45 shows an example of the distribution rate in this modified example.
In this modification, there are three types of results of the special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot distribution rate is the same for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. The fractions of small hits and misses are different between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In particular, in Special Figure 2, the out-of-order result is not derived. It should be noted that the out-of-order result may be derived even in the special figure 2. Further, in FIG. 45 (a), the small hit can be won in either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, but only the special figure 2 may be won.

As shown in FIG. 45 (b), there are two types of jackpots: jackpots with support and jackpots without support. In the first special gaming state (big hit gaming state), which is a special gaming state based on the derivation of a jackpot with support or a jackpot without support, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. In the case of a big hit with support, only the next game will be supported by Fuden after the end of the first special game state. In the case of a big hit without support, it will not be supported by the public train after the end of the first special game state.

Further, there are two types of small hits, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), small hit A and small hit B. In the second special gaming state (small hit gaming state), which is a special gaming state based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Regardless of which small hit, only the next game will be supported by Fuden after the end of the second special game state. That is, the small hit also serves as a time-saving symbol hit to start the Fuden support. In addition, there may be a small hit that does not double as a time-saving symbol hit.
Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (e), a so-called ceiling function is installed. That is, when the number of times the game is executed reaches the number of ceilings (900 in this case), the specific game state (Public support) is generated without generating the special game state.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the gaming states include the normal gaming state ST1, the first special gaming state ST2 based on the first special result (big hit), and the second special gaming state ST3 based on the second special result (small hit). , There is a first specific gaming state ST4.

When a big hit occurs in the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the first special game state ST2. When the first special gaming state ST2 ends, if the transition to the first special gaming state ST2 is based on a big hit with support, the transition to the first specific gaming state ST4 is performed. Further, when the transition to the first special gaming state ST2 is based on the jackpot without support, the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 is performed.

In this first specific game state ST4, if a big hit occurs, the process shifts to the first special game state ST2. Further, in the first specific gaming state ST4, if a small hit occurs, the process shifts to the second special gaming state ST3.
When a small hit occurs in the first specific gaming state ST4 and the transition to the second special gaming state ST3 occurs, there is no general electric support and time reduction in the second special gaming state ST2. If the conditions for Fuden support and time reduction are met, only the next one game will be Fuden support and time reduction, so there is Fuden support and time reduction in the special figure fluctuation display game where the result is a small hit. Even in this state, the end of the special figure variation display game shifts to a state in which there is no normal power support and time reduction. Therefore, in the second special game state ST3, there is no normal power support and time reduction.

After the end of the second special game state ST3, the state returns to the state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4. In this modification, since the small hit also serves as the time saving symbol hit, the next game after the end of the second special game state ST3 will be in a state where there is a normal electric support and a time saving. That is, when the state shifts to the first specific gaming state ST4, the state of reciprocating between the first specific gaming state ST4 and the second special gaming state ST3 continues. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases due to the prize balls acquired in the second special gaming state ST3. This state in which the number of balls is increased continues until a big hit occurs and the state shifts to the first special gaming state ST2. In particular, in the case of a big hit without support, the state of shifting to the normal game state ST1 and the state in which the number of balls held increases ends.
As described above, although the gaming machine is provided with the normal electric support and the reduced working hours, in the second special gaming state ST3, there is always no general electric support and the reduced working hours.

FIG. 47 shows an example of the progress of the game after the big hit occurs. In addition, here, it is a case where there is a big hit with support, and an example of shifting to the first specific gaming state ST4 after the end of the first special gaming state ST2 is shown. The progress of the game is the same even when the second start memory is generated in the normal game state or when the ceiling is reached and the first specific game state ST4 is entered.

Upon termination of the first special gaming state, the special figure variation display game is started (t61). In this example, even when a big hit occurs in the normal game state ST1, there is still no second start memory and the first start memory exists, so that the special figure 1 variable display game is started. There is.
The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game executed for the first time after the end of the first special game state ST2 is set to be sufficient time for the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be opened a plurality of times in the normal electric support. ..

When the variable time of this special figure 1 variable display game ends, the Fuden support ends (t62). This is because only one game will be supported by Fuden after the end of the first special game state. In this example, since the second start memory is generated, the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the special figure 1 variable display game ends (t63). The result of this special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, and the second special gaming state ST3 is reached by the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t64).

After the end of the second special game state ST3, the special figure 2 variable display game is started based on the second start memory (t65). In this modification, since the small hit also serves as the time-saving symbol hit, the next game after the end of the second special game state ST3 will be in a state where there is a normal electric support. Then, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, and the second special gaming state ST3 is reached by the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t67). In addition, since only one game is supported by a small hit, the normal power support ends with the end of the variable time of this special figure 2 variable display game (t66). As a result, in the second special game state ST3, there is no general electric support.
After that, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a support for the general electric power, is started in the same manner, and the second special game state ST3 is repeated by making a small hit. In this way, small hits occur frequently, which increases the number of balls held by the player.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 does not perform the processes of steps A371 to A373 regarding the determination of the time-saving symbol in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 19 (a). Therefore, in this modification, the time saving symbol hit determination process shown in FIG. 21 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 does not perform the processes of steps A391 to A393 relating to the determination of the time-saving symbol in the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 19 (b).

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 does not perform the processes of steps A446 to A452 relating to the determination of the time-saving symbol in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 22.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 does not perform the processes of steps A486 to A492 relating to the determination of the time-saving symbol in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 23.

[Small hit end processing]
In this modification, the game control device 100 performs the support operation setting process shown in FIG. 34 in the small hit end process in the special figure game process shown in FIG. As a result, after the end of the small hit, it will be in a state with general electric support.

From the above, a game control means (game control device) that controls a game in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a start condition and generating a special game state when the result of the game becomes a special result. 100) and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is satisfied by winning the game ball, and the special result includes the first special result (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device and the operation of the conditional device. There is no second special result (small hit), and the game control means includes a normal game state, a specific game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than the normal game state, and a special game state. , And when the result of the game is the predetermined result of the second special result, the specific game state is generated after the special game state (small hit game state, second special game state) is generated. It will be possible to occur.
Therefore, even if it is the second special result, it is possible to generate a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a big hit without support in the first specific game state ST4, the remaining second start memory shifts to the first specific game state ST4 after the end of the special game state ST2, and the advantageous state for the player continues. There is a possibility that it will end up.
In order to prevent such an event, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the probability of losing the game may be increased rather than the probability of a small hit to make it easier to return to the normal gaming state ST1.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, the machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first modification described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained. The gaming machine of this modification can set either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state as the special figure probability.

FIG. 48 shows an example of the fractionation rate in this modified example.
As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the jackpot probability in the high probability state is higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state. Moreover, the small hit probability is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state.
As shown in FIG. 48 (b), there are two types of jackpots: jackpots without high-accuracy support and jackpots with low-accuracy support. The jackpot without high-probability support will be in a high-probability state after the end of the first special game state, and will be in a state without general electric support. It is a so-called ST machine that shifts to a low-probability state when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed eight times in a high-probability state. A big hit with low probability support will be in a low probability state after the end of the first special game state, and will be in a state with general electric support only in the next game.
As shown in FIG. 48 (c), the small hit also serves as the time-saving symbol hit only in the low-probability state, and in the high-probability state, it does not serve as the time-saving symbol hit and the general electric support is not started. ing.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment.

When a big hit occurs in the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the first special game state ST2. When the first special gaming state ST2 is completed, if the transition to the first special gaming state ST2 is based on a big hit with low probability support, the transition to the first specific gaming state ST4 is performed.
In the first specific game state ST4, if a big hit occurs, the game shifts to the first special game state ST2. Further, in the first specific gaming state ST4, if a small hit occurs, the process shifts to the second special gaming state ST3.
When a small hit occurs in the first specific gaming state ST4 and the transition to the second special gaming state ST3 occurs, there is no general electric support and time reduction in the second special gaming state ST2. If the conditions for Fuden support and time reduction are met, only the next one game will be Fuden support and time reduction, so there is Fuden support and time reduction in the special figure fluctuation display game where the result is a small hit. Even in this state, the end of the special figure variation display game shifts to a state in which there is no normal power support and time reduction. Therefore, in the second special game state ST3, there is no normal power support and time reduction.

After the end of the second special game state ST3, the state returns to the state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4. In this modification, in the case of the low probability state, the small hit also serves as the time saving symbol hit, so that the next game after the end of the second special game state ST3 has the normal electric support and the time saving. That is, when the state shifts to the first specific gaming state ST4, the state of reciprocating between the first specific gaming state ST4 and the second special gaming state ST3 continues. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases due to the prize balls acquired in the second special gaming state ST3. This state in which the number of balls is increased continues until a big hit occurs and the state shifts to the first special gaming state ST2.

Further, if the transition to the first special gaming state ST2 is based on the jackpot without high accuracy support, the transition to the second specific gaming state ST5 is performed. In this second specific game state ST5, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and since there is no general electric support, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. In this second specific game state ST5, the special figure variation display game can be executed eight times, and if the eighth special figure variation display game is missed, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In addition, when a small hit occurs in the second specific gaming state ST5 and the transition to the second special gaming state ST3 occurs, the second special gaming state ST2 is continuously in a state where there is no electric support and time reduction. Then, after the end of the second special game state ST3, if it is in a high probability state, that is, if a small hit is won in the special figure variation display game up to the seventh time in the second specific game state ST5, the second specific game state. Return to ST5. Further, after the end of the second special game state ST3, if the probability is low, that is, if the small hit is won in the eighth special figure variation display game in the second specific game state ST5, the game returns to the normal game state ST1. ..

As mentioned above, if a small hit is won in a high probability state, it will also be a time-saving symbol hit, so after the end of the second specific game state ST5, there will be no general electric support, and the second specific game state ST5 or normal game It will shift to the state ST1. Further, in the high probability state, the number of fluctuations in the probability is not normally counted, so that the ceiling does not reach. By providing such a second specific game state ST5, the state in which the number of balls held reciprocates between the first specific game state ST4 and the second special game state ST3 is terminated by winning a big hit without high accuracy support. Is possible.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the first embodiment may also be provided with a low probability state and a high probability state for the special figure probability, and in the case of the high probability state, the lottery per time-saving symbol may not be performed. Further, the high-probability state may be terminated by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times, or may be continued until the next big hit.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is a so-called type 1 + type 2 gaming machine.

In the gaming machine of this modification, a specific area into which the game ball can flow is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 which is opened in the second special gaming state based on the small hit, and the specific area is provided. A lever member operated by a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 53) is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game ball into the game ball. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 53) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and a big hit is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d (V prize). It is designed to be in the first special game state. The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the second special variable winning device 39.

Further, inside the second special variable winning device 39, a residual ball ejection port switch 38e (see FIG. 53) that detects a game ball discharged to the outside of the second special variable winning device 39 without flowing into a specific area (see FIG. 53). Is provided. The number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 39a provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 (the number of game balls flowing into the second special variable winning device 39), the specific area switch 38d, and the remaining ball ejection. When the number of game balls detected by the exit switch 38e (the number of game balls discharged from the second special variable winning device 39) matches, all the game balls in the second special variable winning device 39 are discharged. It can be confirmed, and basically, the new second special variable winning device 39 is not opened until this confirmation is completed.

FIG. 50 shows an example of the fractionation rate in this modification.
In this modification, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), a big hit, a small hit, and a time-saving symbol hit. The jackpot distribution rate is the same for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Further, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability that a special result is derived is always constant. Small hits and time-saving symbol hits are derived only in Special Figure 2. Although the deviation result is not derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the deviation result may be derived.

As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the jackpot includes a 10R jackpot with 10 rounds that can be executed in the first special gaming state and a 5R jackpot with 5 rounds that can be executed in the first special gaming state. There are two types. In the first special gaming state (big hit gaming state), which is a special gaming state based on the derivation of the jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. After the end of the first special game state, only the next game will be supported by Fuden.

Further, there are two types of small hits, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), small hit A and small hit B. In the second special gaming state (small hit gaming state), which is a special gaming state based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. When a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state, the first special game state is set. In this first special gaming state, the number of rounds that can be executed is nine, and by setting the opening of the second special variable winning device 39 in a small hit to one round, the special gaming state is substantially 10 rounds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), for example, there are three types of time-saving symbols per unit A to C. In both cases, only the following games will be in a state with Fuden support.
Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (e), a so-called ceiling function is installed. That is, when the number of times the game is executed reaches the number of ceilings (900 in this case), a specific game state (general electric support) is generated without generating a special game state.

FIG. 51 shows a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the game machine of this modified example. The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, a second special gaming state ST3, and a first specific gaming state ST4. Further, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability that a special result is derived is always constant.

When a big hit occurs in the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the first special game state ST2. The next game after the end of the first special game state ST2 will be in a state where there is a normal electric support and a time reduction, so the game shifts to the first specific game state ST4.
When the game shifts to the first specific game state ST4, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game because the second start memory is generated by winning the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric support. do.

In this first specific game state ST4, if a big hit occurs, the process shifts to the first special game state ST2. Further, in the first specific gaming state ST4, if a small hit occurs, the process shifts to the second special gaming state ST3. If the conditions for Fuden support and time reduction are met, only the next one game will be Fuden support and time reduction, so there is Fuden support and time reduction in the special figure fluctuation display game where the result is a small hit. Even in this state, the end of the special figure variation display game shifts to a state in which there is no normal power support and time reduction. Therefore, in the second special game state ST3, there is no normal power support and time reduction.

When the game ball flows into the specific area in the second special game state ST3 (V prize), the process shifts to the first special game state ST2. If the game ball does not flow into the specific area in the second special game state ST3, the game shifts to the first specific game state ST4 if there is a second start memory, and the normal game state ST1 if there is no second start memory. Move to. That is, when the transition to the first specific gaming state ST4 occurs, the gaming state transitions between the first specific gaming state ST4 and the second special gaming state ST3 until there is no second start memory. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases due to the prize balls acquired in the second special gaming state ST3. This state in which the number of balls is increased continues until a big hit occurs and the player shifts to the first special game state ST2, or after the end of the second special game state ST3, there is no second start memory and the player shifts to the normal game state ST1. do.
As described above, although the gaming machine is provided with the normal electric support and the reduced working hours, in the second special gaming state ST3, there is always no general electric support and the reduced working hours.

FIG. 52 shows an example of the progress of the game after the big hit occurs. The game after the big hit occurs is the same as the example shown in FIG. 40, and the variation time of the special figure variation display game executed for the first time after the end of the first special game state ST2 is the normal variation winning device 37 in the Fuden support. It is said that there is enough time for the opening of the game to be executed multiple times. Then, if the game ball flows into the specific area in the second special game state, the first specific game state is set (t23).

FIG. 53 shows a block diagram of the control system of the gaming machine of this modified example.
Signals from the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the second special variation winning device 39 are input to the input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111. Further, the second output port 134 of the output unit 130 outputs the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member in the second special variation winning device 39.

[Timer interrupt processing]
In this modification, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 54 is performed instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In this timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the second special variable prize device 39 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the second special variable prize device 39 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the second special variable winning device 39 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 39a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, if an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing. On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the special figure game process (step X112) for performing the process related to the special figure variation display game is performed.

[Special game processing]
In this modification, the special figure game process shown in FIG. 55 is performed instead of the special figure game process shown in FIG. In this special figure game process, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the detection of a game ball in the specific area 38h is performed (step A3). Further, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the process shown in FIG. 56 is performed in the specific area switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special figure game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is in progress (step A41). Here, the small hit during the small hit is a period during which the small hit medium treatment and the small hit remaining ball treatment are performed. If this small hit is not in progress (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the specific area switch 38d is effective only during the period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. Further, in the case of a small hit (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is operating (step A42).

When the condition device is operating (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the condition device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the specific area switch (step A43). Then, when there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), the specific area passage flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. Later, based on the presence of this specific area passage flag, a process for generating a special gaming state will be performed.

[Small hit residual ball treatment]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the processing shown in FIG. 57 is performed in the small hit remaining ball processing (step A18) in the special figure game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a residual ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process proceeds to step A863. Further, when the remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), a process for ending the small hit after step A863 is performed.

That is, the process for ending the small hit is performed after all the remaining balls in the second special variable winning device 39 are discharged. However, in the case of a residual ball error in which the discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since the game ball finally flowed into the second special variable winning device 39, the time required for discharge has sufficiently passed. As a result, the process shifts to the process for ending the small hit. Of course, if there is a remaining ball error, it may not be possible to shift to the process for ending the small hit. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the process for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area has been passed (step A863). When the game ball flows into and passes through the specific area 38h, it is detected by the specific area switch 38d and the specific area passage flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not the specific area has been passed based on the presence or absence of the specific area passage flag. When there is a passage through a specific area (step A863; Y), the process proceeds to step A870 to generate a special gaming state. If there is no passage through the specific area (step A863; N), the process proceeds to step A864 to end the small hit game state and perform a process for enabling the special figure variation display game to be executed.

In the process for ending the small hit game state after step A864 and enabling the special figure variation display game to be executed, 10 related to the small hit end process is set as the processing number (step A864), and the special figure game processing number is set. The processing number is saved in the area (step A865). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A866), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A867). Then, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A868), the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

On the other hand, when there is a passage through a specific area (step A863; Y) and a process for generating a special gaming state after step A870 is performed, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area to prepare (step A870), and a production command is used. Perform the setting process (step A871). Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A873).

After that, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) is saved in the external information output data area (step A874), the test signal relating to the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (for example, the signal during operation of the condition device is turned ON, and the accessory is continuously operated. The device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A875).

Then, the number during the big hit is saved in the game state display number area (step A876), the round number upper limit value table is set (step A877), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (this modification). In the case of, 10) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step A878). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). 10 rounds are set as the upper limit of the number of rounds, but since the small hit operation corresponds to the first round, by setting 1 as the initial value of the number of rounds, 9 rounds are released in the special game state. I am doing it.

After that, 3 related to fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A881), and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A882). Further, the V jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A883), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process (step A884) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A868.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability that a special result is derived is always constant.

FIG. 58 shows an example of the fractionation rate in this modified example. The distribution rate of this modification is the same as the distribution rate in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 8 in the case of a big hit as shown in FIG. 58 (b) after the end of the first special gaming state. The difference is that only the game of is equipped with Fuden support.
FIG. 59 shows a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this modified example. The transition of the gaming state in this modification is the transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 9 excluding the case of the jackpot without support. The trigger for the end of the first specific game state ST4 is when the small hits are consecutively lost in the second start memory, or when there is no second start memory and the deviation result is derived in the special figure 1 variation display game. ing. It should be noted that the deviation result may be derived for the special figure 2 variation display game, and the first specific gaming state ST4 may be terminated by the derivation of the deviation result in the special figure 2 variation display game.

By doing so, it is possible to provide a period in which the player's ball is increased due to the frequent occurrence of small hits as in the first embodiment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since there is no change in the special figure probability, the gaming state in the second special gaming state in which the number of gaming balls increases can be set to a state other than the "high probability state and no time reduction" state.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The game machine of this modification has a different order of various processes.

In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), a big hit lottery process (step S1), a big hit symbol lottery process (step S2), a time saving symbol lottery process (step S3), and a variable pattern lottery process (step S3). The processing was performed in the order of step S4) and counting the number of normal probability fluctuations (step S5). The jackpot lottery process (step S1) corresponds to the processes of steps A322 and A342 of FIG. 18, and the jackpot symbol lottery process (step S2) corresponds to the processes of steps A432 to A434 of FIG. 22 and steps A472 to A474 of FIG. handle. Further, the time-saving symbol lottery process (step S3) corresponds to the processes of steps A447 to A449 of FIG. 22 and steps A487 to A489 of FIG. 23, and the variable pattern lottery process corresponds to the processes of steps A326 and A346 of FIG. Further, the process of steps A762, A764, and A765 in FIG. 27 corresponds to the counting of the number of normal probability fluctuations.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present modification, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the variable pattern lottery process (step S4) is performed before the time saving symbol lottery process (step S3). When the general electric support is started from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that reaches the ceiling, the fluctuation pattern lottery process is performed after the time-saving symbol lottery process (step S3) and the counting of the number of normal probability fluctuations (step S4). If this happens, the player may be confused because the special figure fluctuation display game is executed with the fluctuation pattern during the normal electric support without the notification of suddenly instructing to hit right when reaching the ceiling. Therefore, the variable pattern lottery process (step S4) is performed between the big hit symbol lottery process (step S2) and the time-saving symbol lottery process (step S3) or the counting of the number of normal probability fluctuations (step S5). It is possible to prevent the special figure fluctuation display game from being executed with the fluctuation pattern during the normal electric support without the notification of suddenly instructing right-handed when it arrives.

[Sixth variant]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can execute a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests reaching the ceiling.

FIG. 61 shows an example of the ceiling suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81 for displaying the first decorative game of the decorative special figure variation display games is provided. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. At the lower right of the display area, a second decoration game display unit 82 for displaying the second decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 82 is the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81. After the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, it is stopped and the result is displayed.

Further, in the lower center of the display area, a storage display unit 83 for displaying the decorative special drawing start storage display corresponding to the start storage is provided. Of the first start memory and the second start memory, the memory display unit 83 displays information on the start memory corresponding to the main special figure variation display game corresponding to the game state. It should be noted that the information about both start-up memories may be displayed at all times. Here, since it is a normal gaming state, the information of the first start memory is displayed. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the memory display unit 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the order of memory. Here, it is indicated that there are three first start memories. Shows. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

On the left side of the storage display unit 83, an execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the storage display unit 83 is transferred to the running storage display unit 84, and the result, variation pattern, etc. of the special figure variation display game to be executed are transferred. Is suggested by the display mode.

A start storage number display unit 85 for displaying the start storage number is provided in the upper left portion of the display area. The start storage number display unit 85 is provided with a first start storage number display unit 85a for displaying the number of first start storages and a second start storage number display unit 85b for displaying the number of second start storages. ing.
Below the start storage number display unit 85, an effect mode display unit 644 that displays the current effect mode is provided.
Further, in the upper right portion of the display area, a game number display unit 645 for displaying the number of executed games counted for managing the arrival of the ceiling corresponding to the number of normal probability fluctuations is provided. In the gaming machine of this modification, the number of games reaching the ceiling is 900 games, and FIG. 61 (a) shows that 800 games have been executed. The number of games display unit 645 may be displayed regardless of the number of executed games, or may be displayed when the number of executed games is a predetermined number or more (for example, 800 games or more).

As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the variation time ends, the result mode is displayed, the special figure variation display game ends, and the next special figure variation display game starts as shown in FIG. 61 (c). As a result, the decorative special figure start storage display of the storage display unit 83 decreases in response to the decrease in the start storage number, and the display of the start storage number display unit 85 is also updated. In addition, the display of the game number display unit 645 is also updated.

After that, as the game progresses, the number of executed games becomes 850 as shown in FIG. 61 (d), and when the 851st game is started as shown in FIG. 61 (e), it suggests reaching the ceiling. It will be a precursory period, and it will shift to the precursory zone, which is a production mode that suggests the arrival of the ceiling. In this precursory period, in addition to suggesting that the ceiling is nearing, it is also possible to suggest the probability setting value as shown in FIG. 61 (f).

In this way, by suggesting the probability set value in the precursory period when the arrival at the ceiling is near, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who has continued the game until the precursory period when the arrival at the ceiling is near. In addition, since it is possible to suggest reaching the ceiling during the precursory period, it is possible to motivate the player to continue the game until the ceiling is reached, but if the precursory period is long, the player gets bored. There is a risk. However, by allowing the player to be given a privilege during the precursory period, the player can continue the game without getting bored even if the precursory period is long. In addition, even if the ceiling is not reached due to a big hit at a near stage, the privilege of being given a privilege during the precursory period can reduce the disappointment of not reaching the ceiling.

The precursor period is set to 50 games before reaching the ceiling, but the game is not limited to this. In addition, the privilege given to the player during the precursory period was used as a suggestion of the probability setting value, but it is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this, but it is the provision of look-ahead information about the start memory and the execution of the production that does not normally appear. Is also good. In addition, although the number of executed games is displayed numerically on the game number display unit 645, the number of executed games is not displayed clearly, and the color and display mode change as the ceiling is reached. It may indicate the proximity of arrival.

[7th modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machines in this modified example differ in the timing at which the end processing of the Fuden support is performed.

[Processing during special figure change]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the special figure changing process shown in FIG. 62 is performed instead of the special figure changing process shown in FIG. 25. In this special figure change processing, the time reduction change number update process (step A612) for managing the number of times the game is executed in the normal power support state (time saving state) is not performed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Further, the process shown in FIG. 63 is performed instead of the process shown in the latter half of the process during display of the special figure shown in FIG. 27. In this process, a time reduction variation number update process (step A612) for managing the number of times the game is executed in the normal power support state (time saving state) is performed. This time reduction fluctuation number update process is performed before the support operation setting process (step A742) for setting the start of the normal electric support based on the time saving symbol hit in the special figure display process. That is, in the same interrupt processing, the time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing that can end the Fuden support is performed first, and the support operation setting processing that can start the Fuden support is performed later. ..

FIG. 64 shows an example of the progress of the game on the gaming machine of this modified example. This example is the same as the progress of the game shown in FIG. 40. In the gaming machine of this modification, the end timing of the Fuden support is the end timing of the special figure variation display game, that is, the end timing of the stop display time of the result. As a result, the Fuden support started by the end of the first special gaming state ends at the end timing of the special figure variation display game started by the end of the first special gaming state (t13).

In addition, the general electric support by the big hit or the time saving symbol hit is started by the end of the special symbol fluctuation display game which became the time saving symbol hit (t15, t20, t22, t26), and the special symbol fluctuation display game which became the time saving symbol hit. It ends at the end timing of the next special figure variation display game (t17, t22, t24). Here, when the time-saving symbol hits are continuous (t20 to t23), the end and start of the general electric support occurs at the end timing of the special figure variation display game (t22). In this case, the support operation setting process (step A742) that can start the normal electric support by performing the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step A612) that can end the general electric support in the same interrupt process first. ) Will be done later. As a result, new Fuden support will be started after the Fuden support ends. For this reason, in terms of processing, there is no Fuden support for a short period of time, but the execution mode is substantially the same as when the Fuden support is continuous.

By doing the above, when the end and start of the Fuden support are at the same timing, it is possible to end the Fuden support first and then start a new Fuden support. There is no situation in which a new Fuden support is started while the Den support is being executed, and it is possible to reliably start the Fuden support. In particular, if the setting is such that the Fuden support cannot be started by hitting a new time-saving symbol while the Fuden support is still available, the end and start of the Fuden support will be at the same timing. If the end processing of the Fuden support is performed after the start processing of the Fuden support, the Fuden support by the time saving symbol cannot be started. However, by performing the end processing of the Fuden support before the start processing of the Fuden support as in the game machine of this modified example, it is possible to reliably start the Fuden support by hitting the time-saving symbol.

As the effect of the game, the effect shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 and the effect shown in FIG. 43 can be executed. However, when the support status display unit 646 as shown in FIG. 43 is provided, it is usually used for a short period of time when both the condition for ending and the condition for starting the normal power support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game. In the situation where there is no electric support (t22), the display mode of the support status display unit 646 is not the character display and the character display of "waiting for support" indicating that there is no electric support, and the electric support is supported. It is preferable to leave the character display and the character display of "Supporting !!" indicating that there is a certain state. That is, in the situation (t22) in which there is no Fuden support for a short period of time when both the condition for ending the Fuden support and the condition for starting the Fuden support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game, the second state standby is performed. The second state effect (for example, "supporting !!" on the support status display unit 646) is performed without executing the effect (for example, the effect of displaying the characters and characters of "support waiting" on the support status display unit 646). It is preferable to continue the effect of displaying characters and characters). Since the period during which there is no Fuden support is short, it is possible to make the effect easy for the player to understand by not making the player aware that the Fuden support has ended.

Further, during the period from t20 to t24 in FIG. 64, an external information signal (big hit 2 signal) that can identify that the normal electric support is being supported is output. That is, in a situation (t22) in which there is no Fuden support for a short period of time when both the condition for ending the Fuden support and the condition for starting the Fuden support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game, the jackpot 2 signal is It is not turned off and is continued to be turned on. At the timing of t22, the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 128 ms), or at the timing of t22, a pulse signal (described later) may be output separately from the jackpot 2 signal. You can do it. This makes it possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a new pachinko machine support will start.

[Big hit signal]
The game control device 100 may output one big hit signal, two big hit signals, three big hit signals, and four big hit signals as external information signals related to the special game state among the external information signals supplied to the external device such as the management device. It is possible.
Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the gaming control device 100 receives the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the probability state in step A720 of the special figure display processing (FIG. 26). Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved in the external information output data area. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is in the ON state when it is a big hit with a ball (except for the big winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening)), and the big hit without a big winning opening (big winning opening open). When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), it is turned on if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned off otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is in the ON state when it is a big hit with a ball, and is in the OFF state when it is a big hit without a ball.

Further, in step A793 of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (FIG. 30), as signals relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state), for example, one big hit signal in the ON state and four big hit signals in the ON state are externally used. Save to the information output data area.
Further, in step A918 of the jackpot end process (FIG. 35), as signals related to the termination of the jackpot, for example, one jackpot signal in the OFF state, three jackpot signals in the OFF state, and four jackpot signals in the OFF state are saved in the external information output data area. do.

Further, in step A814 of the small hit fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process (FIG. 31), for example, one big hit signal in the ON state is saved in the external information output data area as a signal related to the start of the small hit (second special game state). ..
Further, in the small hit end process (step A19), for example, one big hit signal in the OFF state is saved in the part information output data area as a signal related to the end of the small hit.

Further, in step A69 of the normal probability fluctuation number update process (FIG. 32), step A822 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 34), and step A941 of the jackpot end setting process 2 (FIG. 36 (b)), the time reduction starts. As signals related to, for example, two jackpot signals in the ON state are saved in the external information output data area.
Further, in step A754 of the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process (FIG. 28) and step A931 of the jackpot end setting process 1 (FIG. 36 (a)), for example, the jackpot 2 signal in the OFF state is externally used as a signal related to the end of the time reduction. Save to the information output data area.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 40, since there is no general electric support during each period of t12 to t15, t16 to t20, t21 to t22, and t23 to t26, the jackpot 2 signal is OFF in these periods. Is set to. That is, at t12, t16, t21, and t23, two jackpot signals in the OFF state are saved.
In these periods, even if the Fuden support ends, the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 (when the production mode remains the chance mode), or the game state is the second. Since it is a period corresponding to the case of shifting to the special game state ST3 (when the display of the effect mode display unit 644 is maintained in the same display as in the chance mode), the jackpot 2 signal is continuously turned on in these periods. You may try to do it. That is, when the gaming state remains in the first specific gaming state ST4 even after the end of the Fuden support, or when the gaming state shifts to the second special gaming state ST3, the normal timing (Public support). (At the end of), instead of saving the signal related to the end of the time reduction, a timing different from the normal timing (for example, when a big hit occurs and the game shifts to the first special gaming state ST2, or the second start memory is stored. It is also possible to save the signal regarding the end of the time reduction in the normal game state (ST1).

When one jackpot signal in the ON state is saved, the ON state (output state) of the jackpot 1 signal in the OFF state continues until the jackpot 1 signal in the OFF state is saved, and the jackpot 1 signal in the OFF state is saved. The OFF state (non-output state) of the jackpot 1 signal continues until the jackpot 1 signal in the ON state is saved. The same applies to the big hit 2 signal, the big hit 3 signal, and the big hit 4 signal.

Here, there are cases where the second state (state with normal power support) is reached after the first special game state, and cases where the second state (state with normal power support) is reached without going through the first special game state. The external information signal output by, may be different.
Specifically, at the start of the general electric support based on the jackpot with support (step A941 of the jackpot end setting process 2 (FIG. 36 (b))), the jackpot 2 signal is output as a signal related to the start of the time reduction (ON). 2 signals of the jackpot of the state are saved in the external information output data area), and at the start of the normal electric support based on the arrival at the ceiling (normal probability fluctuation number update process (FIG. 32) step A69) and per time saving symbol. At the start of the general electric support based on this (step A822 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 34)), for example, as shown in FIG. It may be configured as. In the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), ON pulses of 3 jackpot signals are output as pulse signals. The ON pulse of the jackpot 3 signal is, for example, in a state where the jackpot 3 signal in the OFF state is saved in the external information output data area, the jackpot 3 signal in the ON state is saved in the external information output data area for a predetermined short time. After (128 msec here) has elapsed, it can be output by saving the jackpot 3 signals in the OFF state in the external information output data area (returning the jackpot 3 signals saved in the external information output data area to the OFF state).

With this configuration, detailed information can be notified to the outside. That is, the second state (the state with the peripheral support) that the external device starts depending on whether or not the pulse signal (ON pulse of the big hit signal) is received together with the big hit 2 signal is the first special gaming state. It is possible to determine which of the two states is, the second state that does not go through the first special gaming state.
In the case of this configuration, the jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal can be said to be an external information signal that can specify that the second information based on the arrival at the ceiling or the second information based on the time saving symbol hit starts.
In addition, this configuration can also be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a time-saving symbol hit in the result of the special figure variation display game, and in that case, the jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal is based on reaching the ceiling. 2 It can be said that it is an external information signal that can specify that the information starts.
In addition, this configuration can also be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a ceiling function. In that case, the jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal starts the second information based on the time saving symbol hit. It can be said that it is an identifiable external information signal.

Furthermore, the pulse signal output together with the big hit 2 signal (ON pulse of the big hit signal) is different depending on whether it is in the second state based on the arrival at the ceiling or the second state based on the time saving symbol hit. Is also good.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), at the start of the pulse support based on reaching the ceiling (step A69 of the normal probability fluctuation number update process (FIG. 32)), the start of the time reduction is related. Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are output as ON pulses, and at the start of the normal power support based on the time saving symbol hit (step A822 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 34)), a signal related to the start of the time saving. It may be configured to output an ON pulse of 2 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals.

With this configuration, more detailed information can be notified to the outside. That is, depending on whether or not the external device receives the pulse signal together with the big hit 2 signal, the second state (the state with the peripheral support) to start is the second state after the first special gaming state and the first special. It is possible to determine whether it is the second state that does not go through the gaming state, and further, the second state that starts depending on the type of the pulse signal received together with the big hit 2 signal (big hit 3 signal or big hit 4 signal). It is possible to determine whether the state (the state with the peripheral support) is the second state based on the arrival at the ceiling or the second state based on the time saving symbol hit.

It should be noted that the type of pulse signal output together with the big hit 2 signal is not different between the case where the second state is reached based on the arrival at the ceiling and the case where the second state is reached based on the time saving symbol hit, but the big hit 2 signal. The number of output times of the pulse signal to be output may be different.
Specifically, for example, at the start of the Fuden support based on reaching the ceiling, two jackpot signals and one pulse signal (ON pulse of three jackpot signals) are output, and the Fuden support based on the time saving symbol hit is output. At the start, it is also possible to output two jackpot signals and two pulse signals (ON pulses of three jackpot signals).

Even in this configuration, more detailed information can be notified to the outside. That is, depending on whether or not the external device receives the pulse signal together with the big hit 2 signal, the second state (the state with the peripheral support) to start is the second state after the first special gaming state and the first special. It is possible to determine whether it is the second state that does not go through the gaming state, and further, the second state (1 or 2) that starts depending on the number of pulse signals (1 or 2) received together with the big hit 2 signal. It is possible to determine whether the second state based on the arrival at the ceiling or the second state based on the time saving symbol hit (the state with the pulse support).

As described above, in each period of t12 to t15, t16 to t20, t21 to t22, and t23 to t26 in the example shown in FIG. 40, the jackpot 2 signals may be continuously turned on. When the jackpot 2 signal is continuously turned on, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off at the timing (t15, t20, t22, t26) when the pulse support is restarted in order to notify the outside of the timing when the pulse support is started (restarted). A pulse may be output, or a pulse signal (ON pulse of 3 jackpot signals or 4 jackpot signals) may be output in addition to the 2 jackpot signals at the timing (t15, t20, t22, t26) when the normal power support is resumed. ON pulse) may be output.
For the OFF pulse of the jackpot 2 signal, for example, in the state where the jackpot 2 signal in the ON state is saved in the external information output data area, the jackpot 2 signal in the OFF state is saved in the external information output data area for a predetermined short time. After (128 msec here) has elapsed, it can be output by saving the big hit 2 signal in the ON state in the external information output data area (returning the big hit 2 signal saved in the external information output data area to the ON state).

From the above, in the gaming machines of each embodiment and each modification, the gaming control means (gaming control device 100) changes the state of the normal variable winning device 37 to the first state (state without normal electric support). The game is controlled to reach a predetermined number of times (ceiling number) by controlling in either state of the second state (state with normal electric support), which is easier to win than the first state. Based on this, the gaming machine can start the second state and can identify that the second state has occurred (for example, a jackpot 2 signal + a pulse signal (a jackpot 3 signal ON pulse)). It can be configured so that it can be output to the outside of (Fig. 65).

With this configuration, the second state occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, so that a new transition different from the transition of the conventional game state becomes possible, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to. Further, when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, an external information signal is output, and the external information signal specifies that the second state is activated based on the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. Since it is a possible signal, it is possible to accurately notify the game state to the outside of the game machine.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) can start the second state based on the fact that the result of the game is a specific result (per time saving symbol) different from the special result, and the second state is It is possible to configure an external information signal that can identify the occurrence (for example, a jackpot 2 signal + a pulse signal (a jackpot 3 signal or a jackpot 4 signal ON pulse)) to be output to the outside of the gaming machine. It can be done (Fig. 65).

With this configuration, the second state occurs when the result of the game becomes a specific result, so that a new transition different from the transition of the conventional game state becomes possible, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be done. Further, when the result of the game is a specific result, an external information signal is output, and the external information signal is a signal capable of specifying that the second state is activated based on the result of the game being a specific result. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the game state to the outside of the game machine.

[Temporary stop design production]
In the gaming machine of each embodiment and each modification, the effect control device 300 is the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81 of the display device 41, and performs a temporary stop symbol effect which is an effect using the identification information during the temporary stop. It is feasible. Specifically, as the temporary stop symbol effect, the first temporary stop symbol effect using a part of the identification information during the temporary stop, the second temporary stop symbol effect using the entire identification information during the temporary stop, and the second temporary stop symbol effect. Is feasible.
FIG. 66A shows an example of the first temporary stop symbol effect, and FIG. 66B shows an example of the second temporary stop symbol effect.

As shown in FIG. 66, the identification information (decoration identification information 810) displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81 includes a number unit 811, a character unit 812, and a decoration unit 813.
In the decorative identification information 810 shown in FIG. 66 and the like, the number part 811 is arranged in front of the character part 812 so as to overlap the character part 812, but is arranged so as not to overlap the character part 812. Is also good. Further, the decorative portion 813 is arranged behind the character portion 812 so as to overlap the number portion 811 and the character portion 812, but is arranged so as not to overlap at least one of the number portion 811 and the character portion 812. May be.

The first temporary stop symbol effect is an effect in which the decorative portion 813 moves periodically. In FIG. 66A, the decorative portion 813 is an effect image imitating an aura, and the scaling operation is performed in a state where the decorative portion 813 is arranged behind the character portion 812 so as to overlap the character portion 812. As a result, the aura emitted from the character is made to appear to be shaking.
In FIG. 66 (a), the display size of the decorative portion 813 is set so that the decorative portion 813 in the most reduced state is larger than the character portion 812 (at the left end of FIG. 66 (a)). Decorative identification information 810), but is not limited to this. For example, the display size of the decoration unit 813 may be set so that the decoration unit 813 in the most reduced state is smaller than the character unit 812 and the decoration unit 813 in the most enlarged state is larger than the character unit 812. It is possible. By setting in this way, it is possible to generate a period in which the entire decorative portion 813 is hidden by the character portion 812 (a period in which the decorative portion 813 is invisible), so that the aura emitted from the character can be seen and hidden. You can create a production that makes you look like you are doing it.

The first temporary stop symbol effect is an effect in which the display mode (display size in FIG. 66A) of the decoration unit 813 changes periodically in order to make the decoration unit 813 appear to move periodically. It can be said that there is.
Hereinafter, the operation cycle in the first temporary stop symbol effect, that is, the change cycle of the display mode in the first temporary stop symbol effect is referred to as "first cycle Y1". When the first temporary stop symbol effect is the effect shown in FIG. 66 (a), the time until the decorative portion 813 expands and contracts to return to the original size, specifically, the upper part of FIG. 67 (a), for example. As shown in the above, the time required to perform the mode in which the display size of the decorative portion 813 changes (enlarges) from the minimum to the maximum and the mode in which the display size of the decorative portion 813 changes (reduces) from the maximum to the minimum within a predetermined display size range. Is the first period Y1.

The second temporary stop symbol effect is an effect in which the entire decoration identification information 810 moves periodically. In FIG. 66B, the decoration identification information 810 swings up and down in an integrated manner with the number unit 811, the character unit 812, and the decoration unit 813.
In the second temporary stop symbol effect, in order to make it appear that the entire decoration identification information 810 is moving periodically, the entire display mode of the decoration identification information 810 (display position in FIG. 66B) is periodic. It can be said that it is a production that changes in a targeted manner.
Hereinafter, the operation cycle in the second temporary stop symbol effect, that is, the change cycle of the display mode in the second temporary stop symbol effect is referred to as "second cycle Y2". When the second temporary stop symbol effect is the effect shown in FIG. 66 (b), the time until the decoration identification information 810 moves up and down and returns to the original position, specifically, for example, FIG. 67 (a). As shown in the lower row, a mode in which the display position of the decoration identification information 810 changes from the lower end to the upper end (moves upward) and a mode in which the display position changes from the upper end to the lower end (moves downward) within a predetermined display position range. The time required to perform the above is the second cycle Y2.

The effect control device 300 can change the first period Y1 during the execution of the first temporary stop symbol effect. As a result, it becomes possible to execute various first temporary stop symbol productions, so that the interest of the game is enhanced.
Further, it is possible to change the second cycle Y2 during the execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect. As a result, it becomes possible to execute various second temporary stop symbol productions, so that the interest of the game is enhanced.
Further, it is possible to simultaneously execute the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect. As a result, while the decoration identification information 810 is performing a predetermined operation (for example, a swinging operation), a part of the decoration identification information 810 may perform an operation different from the predetermined operation (for example, a scaling operation). As it becomes possible, the fun of the game will increase.
Further, when the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect are executed at the same time, it is possible to make the first cycle Y1 and the second cycle Y2 different. As a result, it becomes possible to execute various temporary stop symbol productions, which enhances the fun of the game.

For example, since the decorative identification information 810 (reach symbol) forming the reach state is displayed as a temporary stop, it is possible to execute at least one of the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect while the reach is occurring. It is possible.
When the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect are executed at the same time while the reach is generated, for example, as shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), the first cycle Y1 and the second cycle Y2 It is possible to make the magnitude relationship different before it develops into SP reach (or when it does not develop into SP reach) and after it develops into SP reach. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a variety of temporary stop symbol productions while the reach is occurring, which enhances the fun of the game.

Specifically, in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), the second cycle Y2 is longer than the first cycle Y1 before the SP reach is developed (or when the SP reach is not developed), and the SP reach is developed. After that, the second cycle Y2 changes during the reach development so that the second cycle Y2 is shorter than the first cycle Y1. That is, the second cycle Y2 after the reach development is shorter than the second cycle Y2 before the reach development. As a result, before the reach development, the movement of the decoration identification information 810 during the temporary stop can be slowed down so that the player can see the decoration identification information 810 relaxedly, and after the reach development, the decoration identification information 810 during the temporary stop can be shown loosely. Since the decoration identification information 810 can be made to stand out by speeding up the movement, the interest of the game is enhanced. In particular, after the reach development, as shown in FIGS. 67 (c) and 67 (d), the display size of the decoration identification information 810 may be smaller than that before the reach development, so that the decoration identification information 810 moves faster. By making it stand out, even if the decoration identification information 810 becomes small, it becomes possible to easily direct the player's attention to the decoration identification information 810 (reach pattern).

In FIG. 67, the first period Y1 before the reach development and the first period Y1 after the reach development are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. Before the reach development, the second cycle Y2 is longer than the first cycle Y1, and after the reach development, the second cycle Y2 is shorter than the first cycle Y1 and after the reach development than the second cycle Y2 before the reach development. The first cycle Y1 before the reach development and the first cycle Y1 after the reach development may be different as long as at least one of the conditions that the second cycle Y2 of the above is short is satisfied.
If the condition that the second cycle Y2 after reach development is shorter than the second cycle Y2 before reach development is satisfied, the second cycle Y2 is longer than the first cycle Y1 before reach development, and the first cycle after reach development. Even if the condition that the second cycle Y2 is shorter than that of Y1 is not satisfied, the effect of making the reach symbol appear loose before the reach development and making the reach symbol stand out after the reach development can be obtained.

Further, if the condition that the second cycle Y2 is longer than the first cycle Y1 before the reach development and the second cycle Y2 is shorter than the first cycle Y1 after the reach development is satisfied, the second cycle Y2 before the reach development is satisfied. Even if the condition that the second cycle Y2 after the reach development is short is not satisfied (for example, the second cycle Y2 before the reach development and the second cycle Y2 after the reach development are the same), the first cycle Y1 Since it is possible to make the second cycle Y2 after reach development look shorter than the second cycle Y2 before reach development, before reach development, the reach pattern is shown loosely, and after reach development. Can get the effect of making the reach pattern stand out.

It should be noted that the first temporary stop symbol effect can be executed even when the reach is not occurring. That is, in the first temporary stop symbol effect, when the decorative identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in any one of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas, any two fluctuations of left, middle, and right are displayed. It can be executed in any case when the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area, or when the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right. be.
Further, the second temporary stop symbol effect can be executed even when the reach is not generated. That is, in the second temporary stop symbol effect, when the decorative identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in any one of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas, any two fluctuations of left, middle, and right are displayed. It can be executed in any case when the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area, or when the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right. be.

Further, in FIGS. 66 (b) and 67 (a) and 67 (b), the display position of the decorative identification information 810 gradually changes between the upper end and the lower end within a predetermined display position range. Not limited to. The second temporary stop symbol effect may be, for example, an effect in which the display position of the decoration identification information 810 changes at once between the upper end and the lower end within a predetermined display position range.
Further, in FIGS. 66 (b) and 67 (a) and 67 (b), the mode in which the decoration identification information 810 moves upward and the mode in which the decoration identification information 810 moves downward are alternately repeated. , Not limited to this. The second temporary stop symbol effect may be, for example, an effect of alternately repeating a mode in which the decoration identification information 810 moves to the left and a mode in which the decoration identification information 810 moves to the right, or the decoration identification information 810. May be an effect of alternately repeating a mode in which the head is rotated in the left direction (clockwise direction) and a mode in which the decorative identification information 810 is rotated in the right direction (counterclockwise direction).

Further, the second temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to the effect that the entire decoration identification information 810 swings (up / down movement, left / right movement, left / right rotation) in a predetermined cycle. That is, the second temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to the effect in which the entire display position of the decoration identification information 810 changes periodically, and the overall display mode (display position, display size, shape, color) of the decoration identification information 810 is , Pattern, transparency, etc., or a combination of these) may be an effect that changes periodically.

Further, in FIGS. 66 (a) and 67 (a) and 67 (b), the display size of the decorative portion 813 gradually changes between the maximum and the minimum within a predetermined display size range. Not limited. As shown in FIG. 68A, for example, the first temporary stop symbol effect may be an effect in which the display size of the decorative portion 813 changes at once between the maximum and the minimum within a predetermined display size range.
Further, in FIGS. 66 (a) and 67 (a) and 67 (b), the mode in which the decorative portion 813 expands and the mode in which the decorative portion 813 contracts are alternately repeated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The first temporary stop symbol effect may be, for example, an effect of repeating a mode in which the decorative portion 813 appears, expands and disappears as shown in FIGS. 68 (b) and 68 (c), or the decorative portion 813 appears. It may be an effect of repeating the mode of reducing and disappearing. In FIG. 68 (c), the broken line indicates that the decorative portion 813 is in a state of disappearing (non-display state). For example, by setting the display size of the decorative portion 813 to "0", the decorative portion 813 is in a state of disappearing.

Further, the first temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to the effect in which the decorative portion 813 expands / contracts (including a mode in which it appears and expands and disappears and a mode in which it appears and contracts and disappears) at a predetermined cycle. That is, the first temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to the effect in which the display size of the decorative unit 813 changes periodically, and the display mode (display position, display size, shape, color, pattern, transparency, etc.) of the decorative unit 813, etc. Alternatively, any combination of these) may be used as long as it is an effect that changes periodically.

FIGS. 69 and 70 show another example of the first temporary stop symbol effect.
In FIG. 69A, the decorative unit 813 is an image including a frame image surrounding the number unit 811 and the character unit 812, and a background image inside the frame image, and is a part of the decorative unit 813 (background image). ) Has a periodic movement. Specifically, the colors and patterns in the display mode of a part (background image) of the decorative portion 813 are periodically changed.
In FIG. 69 (b), the decorative portion 813 is an image including a frame image surrounding the character portion 812 and an effect image 813a imitating a gloss (gloss) moving along the frame image, and is an image including the decorative portion 813. (Effect image 813a) is moving periodically. Specifically, the effect image 813a appears at the lower part of the frame image, is divided into two hands, and moves to the upper part of the frame image. That is, the display position, shape, and the like of the display mode of a part of the decorative portion 813 (effect image 813a) are periodically changed. According to this first temporary stop symbol effect, it is possible to make the frame look glossy by the effect image 813a, and further, the frame is periodically moved or moved by the movement of the effect image 813a. , It is possible to make the light that illuminates the frame appear to move periodically.

The decorative portion 813 is not limited to the image arranged behind the number portion 811 and the character portion 812. The decorative unit 813 may be an image arranged in front of the number unit 811 and the character unit 812, and may be, for example, between the number unit 811 and the character unit 812 (number unit) as shown in FIG. 69 (c). The image may be arranged on the rear side of 811 and on the front side of the character unit 812).
In FIG. 69 (c), the decorative portion 813 is an effect image imitating a lightning bolt, and the entire decorative portion 813 moves periodically. Specifically, the mode in which the decorative portion 813 (effect image imitating a lightning bolt) appears, becomes thin, and disappears is repeated. That is, the color, transparency, and the like in the overall display mode of the decorative portion 813 are periodically changed. For example, by setting the transparency of the decorative portion 813 to "100", the decorative portion 813 is in a state of disappearing.

The decoration identification information 810 may include a plurality of decoration portions 813, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a). In FIG. 70A, the decoration identification information 810 includes, as the decoration portion 813, a first decoration portion 813b which is an image imitating a flag and a second decoration portion 813c which is an image imitating a scarf. , A part of the first decorative part 813b and a part of the second decorative part 813c each move periodically. That is, a part of the display mode of the first decorative portion 813b (display size, shape, color, etc.) and a part of the display mode of the second decorative portion 813c (display size, shape, color, etc.) are periodic. It has changed to. As a result, the flag and scarf worn by the character appear to be shaking.

Since the effect of the first decorative portion 813b making a periodic movement and the effect of the second decorative portion 813c making a periodic movement are both the effects using a part of the decoration identification information 810, the first It is a temporary stop design production. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the operation cycle of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the operation cycle of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) are both set to the first cycle Y1. .. As a result, even if a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects are executed at the same time, it becomes clear that these effects are the first temporary stop symbol effects, so that the interest of the game is enhanced.

In FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the swing direction of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the swing direction of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) are set in the front-rear direction. That is, the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) alternately repeat the forward fluttering mode and the backward fluttering mode.
Further, the timing of swinging back and forth of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the timing of swinging back and forth of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) are synchronized. That is, the timing of switching from the forward fluttering mode to the backward fluttering mode coincides with the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the second decorative portion 813c (scarf), and from the backward fluttering mode to the forward direction. The timing of switching to the fluttering mode coincides between the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the second decorative portion 813c (scarf).
This makes it possible to unify the movement of the first decorative part 813b (flag) and the movement of the second decorative part 813c (scarf), so that the reality is that the flag and the scarf are blown by the wind. It is possible to perform a certain production.

Further, in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the operating range of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is set to be larger than the operating range of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf). That is, the amount of movement of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) per cycle is set to be larger than the amount of movement of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) per cycle. Specifically, for example, the moving distance of the tip of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) per cycle is set longer than the moving distance of the tip of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) per cycle. ing. As a result, the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is produced to appear to be swaying more than the second decorative portion 813c (scarf).

The area of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is larger than that of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf). Therefore, by making the first decorative part 813b (flag) appear to sway more than the second decorative part 813c (scarf), a realistic effect as if the flag and scarf were blown by the wind. Can be done.
Further, the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is arranged behind the second decorative portion 813c (scarf). That is, since the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is arranged at a position farther from the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 than the second decorative portion 813c (scarf), the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is made larger. The case of shaking is less likely to interfere with the visibility of the number part 811 and the character part 812 than the case of shaking the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) greatly. Therefore, by shaking the first decorative part 813b (flag) more than the second decorative part 813c (scarf), it is possible to perform a dynamic effect while suppressing the obstruction of the visibility of the number part 811 and the character part 812. Is possible.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects may be executed with a time lag. For example, one of a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects may be executed in a predetermined period, and the remaining first temporary stop symbol effects may be executed in a period after the predetermined period.
Further, when a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects are executed at the same time (or with a time difference), the direction of operation (for example, the swing direction) in each of the first temporary stop symbol effects may be the same or different. You may be. Further, the timing of the operation in each first temporary stop symbol effect (for example, the timing of swinging back and forth) may or may not be synchronized. Further, the operating range in each of the first temporary stop symbol effects may be the same or different.
Further, when a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects are executed at the same time (or at different times), the types of operations in each of the first temporary stop symbol effects may be the same or different. For example, even if the first temporary stop symbol effect in which one decorative portion 813 swings and the first temporary stop symbol effect in which the other decorative portion 813 performs an expansion / contraction operation are simultaneously executed (or with a time lag). good.

Further, among the operation cycles in the first temporary stop symbol effect, the operation cycle at the start of the first temporary stop symbol effect may be a cycle different from the normal cycle (first cycle Y1).
Specifically, when the first temporary stop symbol effect is the effect shown in FIG. 66 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), from the start timing t51 to the specific timing t52 of the first temporary stop symbol effect. During the period, the decorative portion 813 may be expanded / contracted in the third cycle Y3, which is shorter than the first cycle Y1, and the decorative portion 813 may be expanded / contracted in the first cycle Y1 after the specific timing t52. As a result, the first temporary stop symbol effect can be made to stand out at the start of the first temporary stop symbol effect, so that the player can be notified of the start of the first temporary stop symbol effect.

In the first temporary stop symbol effect performed during the reach generation, when the operation is performed in the third cycle Y3 at the start of the first temporary stop symbol effect, the specific timing t52 is a timing before the reach development time. Is preferable.
Further, the third cycle Y3 may be longer or shorter than the second cycle Y2 after the reach development.
Further, when a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects are executed with a time lag, after any one of the plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects is executed in the third cycle Y3, the remaining first temporary stop symbol effects are performed. It may be executed in the first cycle Y1. Specifically, for example, during the period from the start timing t51 to the specific timing t52, the first temporary stop symbol effect (effect image imitating lightning flashing) shown in FIG. 69 (c) is performed in the third cycle Y3. After the specific timing t52, the first temporary stop symbol effect (effect image imitating the aura may be scaled) shown in FIG. 66A may be executed in the first cycle Y1.
Further, among the operation cycles in the second temporary stop symbol effect, the operation cycle at the start of the second temporary stop symbol effect may be a cycle different from the normal cycle (second cycle Y2).

The first temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to the effect that a part or the whole of the decorative part 813 moves periodically (the effect that the display mode of a part or the whole of the decorative part 813 changes periodically), and the character. It may be an effect in which a part or the whole of the part 812 moves periodically (an effect in which the display mode of a part or the whole of the character part 812 changes periodically), or a part or the whole of the number part 811. May be an effect of periodically moving (an effect of periodically changing the display mode of a part or the whole of the number part 811). That is, since the first temporary stop symbol effect is an effect using a part of the decoration identification information 810, it may be an effect using, for example, the decoration portion 813 as described above, for example, FIG. 71 (a). The effect may be an effect using the character unit 812 as shown in FIG. 71, or may be an effect using, for example, the number unit 811 as shown in FIG. 71 (b).
In FIG. 71 (a), a part of the character unit 812 is moving periodically. Specifically, the character's mouth opens and closes.
In FIG. 71 (b), the number part 811 is an image including a number image and an effect image 811a imitating a gloss (gloss) moving along the number image, and is a part of the number part 811 (effect). Image 811a) is moving periodically.

Further, when a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects are executed at the same time (or with a time lag), for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), all of the plurality of types are the first temporary stop using the decorative portion 813. It may be a symbol effect, all of the plurality of types may be the first temporary stop using the number part 811, or all of the plurality of types may be the first temporary stop using the character part 812. It may be a design effect.
Alternatively, at least two of the first temporary stop symbol effect using the number part 811, the first temporary stop symbol effect using the character part 812, and the first temporary stop symbol effect using the decorative part 813 are simultaneously (or time-differenced). You may do it. Specifically, for example, a first temporary stop symbol effect in which a part of the character portion 812 (character hair) moves periodically, and a first decoration portion 813b (flag) in which the first decorative portion 813b (flag) moves periodically. The temporary stop symbol effect and the first temporary stop symbol effect in which the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) moves periodically may be executed at the same time (or with a time lag).

As shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), the character portion 812 of the decoration identification information 810 may be hidden at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of reach development). Further, the decorative portion 813 of the decorative identification information 810 may be hidden at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of reach development). That is, in FIG. 67 (d), in the decoration identification information 810 after the reach development (after the display size is switched), the number part 811, the character part 812, and the decoration part 813 are all in the display state. Not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), the character unit 812 may be in a non-display state, the decorative unit 813 may be in a non-display state, and the character unit 812 and the decorative unit 813 may not be displayed. It may be in the display state.
Further, in FIGS. 67 (c) and 71 (c), in the decoration identification information 810 before the reach development (before the display size switching), the number part 811, the character part 812, and the decoration part 813 are all displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the character portion 812 and the decorative portion 813 may be hidden.

When the character unit 812 is in the non-display state, in the second temporary stop symbol effect, the number unit 811 and the decorative unit 813 are integrally moved in a periodic manner.
Further, when the decorative portion 813 is in the non-display state, in the second temporary stop symbol effect, the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 are integrally moved in a periodic manner.
Further, when the character unit 812 and the decorative unit 813 are in the non-display state, the number unit 811 moves periodically in the second temporary stop symbol effect. That is, when the character unit 812 and the decorative unit 813 are in a non-display state, the second temporary stop symbol effect is an effect in which the entire number unit 811 moves periodically, and the first temporary stop symbol effect is the number unit 811. A part of it will be a production that moves periodically.

Further, in FIGS. 67 (d) and 71 (d), the decoration identification information 810 after the reach development (after the display size switching) is more than the display size of the decoration identification information 810 before the reach development (before the display size switching). The display size is smaller, but the display size is not limited to this, and the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after the reach development (after the display size is switched) may be larger. Whether the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after switching the display size is smaller or the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after switching the display size is larger than when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large. The condition that the second cycle Y2 is shorter when it is smaller (and / or when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is larger, the second cycle Y2 is longer than the first cycle Y1 and the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is larger. If the condition that the second cycle Y2 is shorter than the first cycle Y1 when it is small) is satisfied, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large, the movement of the decoration identification information 810 is slowed down to identify the decoration to the player. The information 810 can be displayed in a relaxed manner, and when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is small, the decoration identification information 810 can be moved quickly to make the decoration identification information 810 stand out.

Further, the timing at which the display size of the decoration identification information 810 changes (switches) is not limited to the time of development to SP reach, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the display size of the decoration identification information 810 before the reach development and the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after the reach development may be the same.
Further, regardless of whether the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched or not during the execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect, the condition that the second cycle Y2 is shorter in the second period than in the first period (and / Or, if the condition that the second cycle Y2 is longer than the first cycle Y1 in the first period and the second cycle Y2 is shorter than the first cycle Y1 in the second period) is satisfied, the decoration identification information 810 is satisfied in the first period. It is possible to slow down the movement of the decoration identification information 810 to show the decoration identification information 810 to the player in a relaxed manner, and in the second period, it is possible to speed up the movement of the decoration identification information 810 to make the decoration identification information 810 stand out. .. The first period here may be before the reach development, after the reach development, or at any other period. Further, the second period may be before the reach development, after the reach development, or any other period as long as it is a period other than the first period.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, the game is controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game and the effect control means. The display means (display device 41) for displaying the game is provided, and the effect control means is a decoration game (decoration special figure variation display game) in which the identification symbol (decoration identification information 810) is variablely displayed in accordance with the game. Can be displayed on the display means, and when the first effect (second temporary stop symbol effect) and the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) that periodically move using the identification symbol are executed, Before shifting from the first state (state in which N reach effect is executed) to the second state (state in which SP reach effect is executed), the first state is higher than the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1). After lengthening the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the production and shifting from the first state to the second state, the movement in the first production is larger than the movement cycle in the second production (first cycle Y1). (Second cycle Y2) can be shortened (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)).

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the first is before the transition to the second state (or when the transition to the second state is not performed) and after the transition to the second state. It is possible to make the magnitude relationship between the cycle of movement in the production and the cycle of movement in the second production different.
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decorative game but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variablely displayed in the decorative game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first state is not limited to the state of executing the N reach effect, and the second state is not limited to the state of executing the SP reach effect. For example, the state before the reach state may be set as the first state, and the state after the reach state may be set as the second state. Alternatively, of the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right, the state in which the decorative identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the A variable display area is set as the first state, and B (B ≠ A). The state in which the decorative identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display area of the above may be set as the second state.
Further, before shifting to the second state, the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be shorter than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect, or the second period. The cycle of movement in the production (first cycle Y1) and the cycle of movement in the first production (second cycle Y2) may be the same.
Further, after the transition to the second state, the cycle of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be longer than the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1), or the second period may be longer. The cycle of movement in the production (first cycle Y1) and the cycle of movement in the first production (second cycle Y2) may be the same.

In addition, a production control means for controlling the production of a game in a game machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to the player according to the result of the game. (Effect control device 300) and a display means (display device 41) controlled by the effect control means to display the game, and the effect control means corresponds to a game and has an identification symbol (decorative identification information 810). It is possible to display a decorative game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the image on the display means, and as an effect using the identification symbol (temporary stop symbol effect), the first effect (second provisional) that moves periodically. When the stop symbol effect) and the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed, and the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed using the identification symbol (reach symbol) forming the reach state. Before the development of the reach effect, the period of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) is longer than the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1), and after the development of the reach effect, the first period. It is possible to make the cycle of movement (second cycle Y2) in the first effect shorter than the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1) (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)).

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time while the reach is occurring, the first effect is before the reach effect develops (or when the reach effect does not develop) and after the reach effect develops. It is possible to make the magnitude relationship between the cycle of movement in the second production and the cycle of movement in the second effect different.
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decorative game but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variablely displayed in the decorative game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In particular, during the reach, the player is paying attention to the identification symbol (reach symbol) that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative game. Therefore, it is possible to perform various effects using what the player is paying attention to while the reach is occurring, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Before the reach effect is developed, the period of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be shorter than the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1), or in the second effect. The cycle of movement (first cycle Y1) and the cycle of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be the same.
Further, after the reach effect is developed, the period of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be longer than the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1), or in the second effect. The cycle of movement (first cycle Y1) and the cycle of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be the same.

The first effect (second temporary stop symbol effect) is an effect in which the entire identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) moves periodically, and the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) is identification. A part of the design (decorative identification information 810) may be configured to have a periodic movement (see FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b)). That is, the first cycle Y1 <the second cycle Y2 may be set before the reach development, and the first cycle Y1> the second cycle Y2 may be set after the reach development.
With this configuration, before the reach development, the movement of the entire identification symbol can be slowed down to make the reach symbol appear loose to the player, and the movement of a part of the identification symbol can be made faster. It is possible to enhance the decorativeness by making a part stand out, and after the reach development, it is possible to make the movement of the entire identification symbol faster and make the reach symbol stand out, and at the same time, it is possible to make the movement of a part of the identification symbol stand out. By delaying and making the part inconspicuous, it is possible to make other effects (for example, SP reach effects) stand out, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, when the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time, in the identification symbol, a part of the identification symbol moves periodically while the entire identification symbol moves periodically. Because it is possible to play, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
The second effect may be a second temporary stop symbol effect, that is, an effect in which the entire identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) moves periodically.
Further, the first effect may be a first temporary stop symbol effect, that is, an effect in which a part of the identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) moves periodically.

Further, the identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) includes the number unit 811, the character unit 812, and the decoration unit 813, and the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) includes the number unit 811 and the character unit 812. , And any one or two of the decorative portions 813 may be configured to have a periodic movement (FIGS. 66 (a), 68 (b), 69 (a), (b). ), (C), FIG. 70 (a), FIGS. 71 (a), (b)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute various second effects, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.
The decorative portion 813 is, for example, an image other than the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 among the images constituting the identification symbol.

Further, after the reach effect is developed, at least one of the character unit 812 and the decorative unit 813 may be configured to be hidden (see FIG. 71 (d)).
With this configuration, it is possible to make the character image and decorative image (for example, effect image) displayed in the effect (for example, SP reach effect) to be executed after the reach development stand out, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be done. On the other hand, after the reach is developed, it is possible to make the reach symbol stand out by speeding up the movement of the entire identification symbol, so that inconvenience (reach) that may occur when at least one of the character portion 812 and the decorative portion 813 is hidden. Inconveniences such as inconspicuous patterns) can be avoided.
The period during which at least one of the character unit 812 and the decorative unit 813 is hidden is not limited after the reach effect is developed.

Further, the display size of the identification symbol (reach symbol) forming the reach state may be configured to be smaller after the development than before the development of the reach effect (FIGS. 67 (c), (d), See FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d)).
With this configuration, it is possible to secure a sufficient area as an effect display unit for displaying an effect (for example, SP reach effect) to be executed after the reach is developed in the display area of the display device 41. Can enhance the interest of. On the other hand, after the reach is developed, it is possible to make the reach symbol stand out by speeding up the movement of the entire identification symbol, which may occur due to the smaller display size of the reach symbol (inconvenience such as the reach symbol being inconspicuous). Can be avoided.
The display size of the identification symbol (reach symbol) forming the reach state may be larger after the development than before the development of the reach effect, or may be the same before and after the development of the reach effect.

Further, the period of movement in the first effect (second period Y2) may be configured to be shorter after the development than before the development of the reach effect (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)). ..
With this configuration, the movement cycle in the first effect is only changed (switched) at the time of reach development, and before the reach development, the movement of the entire identification symbol is slowed down to make the reach symbol appear loose to the player. After the reach is developed, it becomes possible to make the reach symbol stand out by speeding up the movement of the entire identification symbol.
The cycle of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be longer after the development than before the development of the reach effect, or may be the same before and after the development of the reach effect.

In addition, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has a second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) in which the first portion (for example, the first decorative portion 813b) of the identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) moves periodically. ) And the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) in which the second part of the identification symbol (for example, the second decorative portion 813c) moves periodically can be executed at the same time, and the movement of the first part can be executed. The cycle of is the same as the cycle of movement of the second part (first cycle Y1), and the amount of movement per cycle of the first part is configured to be different from the amount of movement per cycle of the second part. It may be (see FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b)).
With this configuration, using one identification symbol, there are two types of effects: a second effect in which the first part moves periodically and a second effect in which the second part moves periodically. Since it is possible to execute the second production at the same time, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, the cycle of movement is the same in the first part and the second part, and the amount of movement (movement amount) per cycle is different between the first part and the second part. It becomes possible and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The cycle of movement of the first part may be different from the cycle of movement of the second part.
Further, the amount of movement per cycle may be larger in the first portion or larger in the second portion. Further, the amount of movement per cycle of the first part may be the same as the amount of movement per cycle of the second part.
Further, the second effect in which the first part of the identification symbol moves periodically, the second effect in which the second part of the identification symbol moves periodically, and the third part of the identification symbol are periodic. The second effect of movement may be executed at the same time. That is, not only two types of second effects may be executed at the same time, but also three or more types of second effects may be executed at the same time.

Further, the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) may be configured so that the cycle of movement is switched at the specific timing t52 before the reach effect develops (see FIG. 70 (c)).
With this configuration, the cycle of movement is switched from the third cycle Y3 to the first cycle Y1 at the specific timing t52 before the reach effect develops, so that the second effect can be made conspicuous at the start of the second effect. It will be possible. That is, since it is possible to notify the player of the start of the second effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The cycle before switching at the specific timing t52 (third cycle Y3) may be shorter or longer than the cycle after switching (first cycle Y1).
Further, the first effect (second temporary stop symbol effect) may be configured such that the cycle of movement is switched from the fourth cycle Y4 to the second cycle Y2 at the specific timing t52 before the reach effect develops. The cycle before switching at the specific timing t52 (fourth cycle Y4) may be shorter or longer than the cycle after switching (second cycle Y2).
Further, the specific timing t52 is not limited to before the reach effect is developed.
Further, in the case where the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time, the cycle of movement is switched from the third cycle Y3 to the first cycle Y1 in the second effect, and the cycle of movement is changed in the first effect. When switching from the fourth cycle Y4 to the second cycle Y2, the timing at which the motion cycle is switched may be the same or different between the first effect and the second effect.

In addition, a production control means for controlling the production of a game in a game machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to the player according to the result of the game. (Effect control device 300) and a display means (display device 41) controlled by the effect control means to display the game, and the effect control means corresponds to a game and has an identification symbol (decorative identification information 810). It is possible to display a decorative game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the display as a display means, and as an effect using an identification symbol (temporary stop symbol effect), the first effect (first effect) in which the display mode changes periodically. 2 Temporary stop symbol effect) and 2nd effect (1st temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed, and the 1st effect and the 2nd effect are simultaneously executed using the identification symbol (reach symbol) forming the reach state. In this case, before the reach effect is developed, the change cycle of the display mode (second cycle Y2) in the first effect is made longer than the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1), and the reach effect is achieved. After the development, it is possible to make the change cycle of the display mode (second cycle Y2) in the first effect shorter than the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1) (FIG. 67 (a). ), (B)).

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time while the reach is occurring, the first effect is before the reach effect develops (or when the reach effect does not develop) and after the reach effect develops. It is possible to make the magnitude relationship between the change cycle of the display mode in the above and the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect different.
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decorative game but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variablely displayed in the decorative game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In particular, during the reach, the player is paying attention to the identification symbol (reach symbol) that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative game. Therefore, it is possible to perform various effects using what the player is paying attention to while the reach is occurring, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Before the reach effect is developed, the display mode change cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be shorter than the display mode change cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect. The change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1) and the change cycle of the display mode in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be the same.
Further, after the reach effect is developed, the change cycle of the display mode (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be longer than the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1). The change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1) and the change cycle of the display mode in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be the same.

In addition, a production control means for controlling the production of a game in a game machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to the player according to the result of the game. (Effect control device 300) and a display means (display device 41) controlled by the effect control means to display the game, and the effect control means corresponds to a game and has an identification symbol (decorative identification information 810). It is possible to display a decorative game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the image on the display means, and as an effect using the identification symbol (temporary stop symbol effect), the first effect (second provisional) that moves periodically. The stop symbol effect) and the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed, and the first effect and the second effect can be simultaneously performed using a predetermined identification symbol (for example, decorative identification information 810 during temporary stop). When the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched during the execution of these effects (FIGS. 67 (c), (d), 71 (c), (d)), the predetermined size is executed. Before the display size of the identification symbol is switched, the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect is made longer than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect, and the predetermined identification symbol is displayed. After the size is switched, it is possible to make the cycle of movement (second cycle Y2) in the first effect shorter than the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1) (FIG. 67 (a), See (b)).

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed using the predetermined identification symbol, before the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched and after the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched. It is possible to make the magnitude relationship between the cycle of movement in the first production and the cycle of movement in the second production different.
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decorative game but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variablely displayed in the decorative game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Before the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched, the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be shorter than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect. , The cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1) and the cycle of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be the same.
Further, after the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched, the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be longer than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect. However, the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1) and the cycle of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be the same.

In addition, a production control means for controlling the production of a game in a gaming machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to the player according to the result of the game. (Effect control device 300) and a display means (display device 41) controlled by the effect control means to display the game, and the effect control means corresponds to a game and has an identification symbol (decorative identification information 810). It is possible to display a decorative game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the image on the display means, and as an effect using the identification symbol (temporary stop symbol effect), the first effect (second provisional) that moves periodically. When the stop symbol effect) and the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed, and the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed using the identification symbol (reach symbol) forming the reach state. Before the development of the reach effect, the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect is smaller than the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect, and after the development of the reach effect, the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect. It is possible to make the movement amount per unit time in the first effect larger than the movement amount of (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)).

Specifically, in the case of an effect in which the decorative portion 813 expands or contracts as a whole (for example, FIG. 66A), the movement amount (movement amount) per unit time in the effect is, for example, a predetermined point in the decorative portion 813. It is the moving distance per cycle (a point located away from the center of the decorative portion 813).
Further, in the case of an effect in which the entire decoration identification information 810 swings in the vertical direction (for example, FIG. 66B), the movement amount (movement amount) per unit time in the effect is, for example, one of the decoration identification information 810. The distance traveled per cycle.

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time while the reach is occurring, the first effect is before the reach effect develops (or when the reach effect does not develop) and after the reach effect develops. It is possible to make the relationship between the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect and the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect different.
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decorative game but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variablely displayed in the decorative game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In particular, during the reach, the player is paying attention to the identification symbol (reach symbol) that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative game. Therefore, it is possible to perform various effects using what the player is paying attention to while the reach is occurring, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Before the reach effect is developed, the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect may be larger than the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect, or the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect may be larger. And the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect may be the same.
Further, after the reach effect is developed, the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect may be smaller than the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect, or the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect may be smaller. And the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect may be the same.

Before the reach effect is developed (or before the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched), the second cycle Y2 may be set to infinity. That is, before the reach effect is developed (or before the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched), the movement amount (movement amount) per unit time in the second temporary stop symbol effect is set to "0", and the identification symbol is displayed. The second temporary stop symbol effect, which is an effect in which the whole moves periodically, may not be executed (it seems that the second temporary stop symbol effect is not executed).
Further, after the reach effect is developed (or after the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched), the first cycle Y1 may be set to infinity. That is, after the reach effect is developed (or after the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched), the movement amount (movement amount) per unit time in the first temporary stop symbol effect is set to "0" to set the identification symbol. The first temporary stop symbol effect, which is an effect in which a part of the above moves periodically, may not be executed (it seems that the first temporary stop symbol effect is not executed).

Further, the first effect is an effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) in which a part of the identification symbol (decoration identification information 810) moves periodically, and the second effect is an identification symbol (decoration identification information 810). It may be configured so that the whole of is an effect (second temporary stop symbol effect) in which the movement is periodic.
Specifically, when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed using the identification symbol forming the reach state, before the reach effect develops (or before the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched). , The period of movement in the first effect (first cycle Y1) is made longer than the cycle of movement in the second effect (second cycle Y2), and after the reach effect is developed (or the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched). After) may be configured so that the cycle of movement (first cycle Y1) in the first effect is shorter than the cycle of movement in the second effect (second cycle Y2). That is, the first cycle Y1> the second cycle Y2 may be set before the reach development (or before the display size switching), and the first cycle Y1 <the second cycle Y2 may be set after the reach development (or after the display size switching).

With this configuration, before the reach development, it is possible to speed up the movement of the entire identification symbol to make the reach symbol stand out, and at the same time, slow down the movement of a part of the identification symbol to see the part. By not standing up, it is possible to make other effects (for example, N reach effect) stand out, and after the reach is developed, it is possible to slow down the movement of the entire identification symbol and make the reach symbol appear loose to the player. By speeding up the movement of a part of the identification symbol and making the part stand out, it is possible to enhance the decorativeness, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

If the first cycle Y1> the second cycle Y2 is set before the reach development (or before the display size is switched), and the first cycle Y1 <the second cycle Y2 is set after the reach development (or after the display size switching), the reach effect is developed. (Or before the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched), the second cycle Y2 is set to "0", and the second temporary stop symbol effect, which is an effect in which the entire identification symbol moves periodically, is executed. It may be set not to (make it appear that the second temporary stop symbol effect is not executed).
Further, when the first cycle Y1> the second cycle Y2 is set before the reach development (or before the display size switching), and the first cycle Y1 <the second cycle Y2 is set after the reach development (or after the display size switching), the reach effect is produced. After the development of (or after the display size of the predetermined identification symbol is switched), the first cycle Y1 is set to "0", and the first temporary stop is an effect in which a part of the identification symbol moves periodically. It is also possible not to execute the symbol effect (make it appear that the first temporary stop symbol effect is not executed).

Further, in a game machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game and the effect control means are controlled to relate to the game. A display means (display device 41) for displaying is provided, and the effect control means displays a decorative game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variablely displays an identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) according to the game. The display size of the identification symbol can be changed (see FIGS. 67 (c), (d), 71 (c), (d)), and periodic movements can be performed using the identification symbol. It is possible to execute the effect (temporary stop symbol effect) to be performed (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)).
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decorative game, but also to change the display size of the identification symbol that is variablely displayed in the decorative game, and to produce an effect that the identification symbol that is variablely displayed in the decorative game moves periodically. Since it is feasible, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Here, when the decoration identification information 810 swings in the vertical direction (FIG. 66 (b)) as the second temporary stop symbol effect, the decoration identification information is as shown in FIG. 72 (a), for example. The upward movement distance of the decoration identification information 810 is n times the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 (n = 0.5 in FIG. 72 (a)), and the downward movement distance of the decoration identification information 810 is also It is n times the length of the decoration identification information 810 in the vertical direction. That is, the amount of movement (absolute movement amount) per cycle of the decoration identification information 810 is 2n times the length of the decoration identification information 810 in the vertical direction.

In FIG. 72 (a), the decoration identification information 810 swings in the vertical direction, and the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is small (the length in the vertical direction is short) due to the development to SP reach. Before the reach development (before the display size switching), the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the decoration identification information 810 is 2n times the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 before the display size switching. After the reach is developed (after the display size is switched), the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the decoration identification information 810 becomes 2n times the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size is switched. There is.
That is, in FIG. 72 (a), the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the decoration identification information 810 is proportional to the display size of the decoration identification information 810 (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 72 (a)). ing. Therefore, the absolute movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 (the absolute movement amount per cycle visually recognized by the player) is different before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, but the decoration is displayed. The relative movement amount (relative movement amount per cycle visually recognized by the player) with respect to the display size of the identification information 810 is the same before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched. Hereinafter, the amount of movement relative to the display size may be simply referred to as "relative amount of movement".

It is also possible to make the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 different before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched.
Specifically, for example, in the case of executing an effect in which the decoration identification information 810 swings in the vertical direction as the second temporary stop symbol effect, the development to SP reach during the execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect. When the display size of the decoration identification information 810 becomes small (the length in the vertical direction is short), for example, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c), before the reach development (before the display size is switched), The absolute amount of movement per cycle of the decoration identification information 810 is set to 2n times the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 before the display size is switched, and after the reach is developed (after the display size is switched), the decoration identification information is displayed. The absolute amount of movement per cycle of the 810 can be 2 m times (m ≠ n) the vertical length of the decorative identification information 810 after the display size is switched.

In FIG. 72 (b), n = 0.5 and m = 1.0, and in FIG. 72 (c), n = 0.5 and m = 2.0. That is, in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c), m> n.
For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 is before the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched (when the display size is large) and after the display size is switched (display size). When is the same as (when is small), that is, when m = n, the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is reduced, so that the absolute operation amount of the decoration identification information 810 is reduced. The smaller the absolute amount of movement, the more difficult it is to recognize whether or not the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped (swinging), so that the player is more likely to misidentify the game situation. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c), the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 is larger than that before the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched (when the display size is large). If the display size is larger after the display size is switched (when the display size is smaller), that is, when m> n, the absolute operation amount is reduced even if the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is reduced. No (or the absolute decrease in the amount of movement is suppressed as compared with the case where m = n). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the misidentification of the player, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Further, in this way, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 during temporary stop is small, the movement of the decoration identification information 810 is increased (it is made to appear as if the movement is increased), so that the decoration identification information 810 is conspicuous. Therefore, even if the decoration identification information 810 is small, it is possible to easily direct the player's attention to the decoration identification information 810, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

That is, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is smaller than the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large (when the normal size is used) (smaller than the normal size). By increasing the relative amount of movement of the decoration identification information 810 (when the size is specific), it is possible to suppress the misidentification of the player, and even if the decoration identification information 810 is small, the decoration identification information 810 can be suppressed. Can be made to stand out.

In FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c), the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 before the display size switching is 2.0 times the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size switching. However, it is not limited to this. That is, the display size of the decoration identification information 810 before the display size switching may be larger than the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size switching.
Further, the display size of the decoration identification information 810 before the display size switching may be smaller than the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size switching. Also in this case, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is smaller than the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large. If the condition that the size is larger is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the misidentification of the player, and it is possible to make the decoration identification information 810 stand out even if the decoration identification information 810 is small.

Further, in FIG. 72 (b), the absolute operation amount of the decoration identification information 810 is the same before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, but the absolute operation amount is not limited to this. That is, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is small is larger than the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large. If the condition of being large is satisfied, the absolute operation amount of the decoration identification information 810 may be the same before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, or the display size of the decoration identification information 810 may be the same. It may be larger before the switch, or it may be larger after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched.

Further, in FIG. 72 (c), the operating range (operating range visually recognized by the player) of the decorative identification information 810 is the same before and after the display size of the decorative identification information 810 is switched, but the present invention is limited to this. Not done. That is, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is small is larger than the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large. As long as the condition of being large is satisfied, the operating range (display position range) of the decoration identification information 810 may be the same before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, or the decoration identification information 810 may be the same. It may be larger before the display size is switched, or may be larger after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched.

Further, among the effect modes of the second temporary stop symbol effect, the effect mode in which the second cycle Y2 is different before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, and before the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched. It is also possible to execute in combination with an effect mode in which the relative amount of movement is different from the later.
Specifically, for example, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 becomes small (the length in the vertical direction is short) due to the development to SP reach during the execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect, the second temporary stop is performed. As a design effect, the effect mode in which the second cycle Y2 is shorter after the reach development than before the reach development (for example, FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)) is relative to the effect after the reach development than before the reach development. You may execute an effect that combines an effect mode (for example, FIG. 72 (b) or FIG. 72 (c)) that increases the amount of movement. As a result, after the reach is developed, the decoration identification information 810 during the temporary stop moves quickly and greatly. Therefore, even if the decoration identification information 810 becomes smaller due to the development to the SP reach, the player's attention is displayed and the identification information 810 (reach). It will be possible to make it easier to turn to the design), and the interest of the game will increase.

Further, the swing direction of the decoration identification information 810 is not limited to the vertical direction.
For example, even when the decoration identification information 810 swings in the left-right direction as the second temporary stop symbol effect, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 is set before the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched. It is possible to make it different between and later.
Specifically, for example, in the case of executing an effect in which the decoration identification information 810 swings in the left-right direction as the second temporary stop symbol effect, the development to SP reach during the execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect. When the display size of the decoration identification information 810 becomes small (the length in the left-right direction is short), the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the decoration identification information 810 is used before the reach is developed (before the display size is switched). , The length of the decoration identification information 810 before switching the display size is set to 2n times the length in the left-right direction, and after the reach is developed (after the display size is switched), the absolute operation amount per cycle of the decoration identification information 810 is displayed. It is possible to make the length of the decoration identification information 810 after switching 2 m times (m ≠ n) in the left-right direction. Also in this case, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is smaller than the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large (for example, before the reach development) (for example, after the reach development). If the condition that the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 is larger is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the misidentification of the player, and even if the decoration identification information 810 is small, the decoration identification information 810 is conspicuous. It will be possible to make it.

Further, for example, when the decoration identification information 810 is rotated in the left-right direction (clockwise / counterclockwise direction) as the second temporary stop symbol effect, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 is also calculated. , It is possible to make the display size of the decoration identification information 810 different before and after switching. Also in this case, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is smaller than the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large. If the condition that the size is larger is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the misidentification of the player, and it is possible to make the decoration identification information 810 stand out even if the decoration identification information 810 is small.

Further, it is also possible to execute the first temporary stop symbol effect in an effect mode in which the relative movement amount is different between before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched.
Specifically, for example, there is a case where the decorative unit 813 performs an effect (FIG. 66 (a)) that expands and contracts as a whole as the first temporary stop symbol effect, and during the execution of the first temporary stop symbol effect. When the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched due to the development to SP reach, the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the decoration unit 813 (for example, a predetermined point in the decoration unit 813 (away from the center of the decoration unit 813)). The moving distance per cycle of the point at the position) is set to 2n times the display size (for example, the length in the left-right direction) of the decoration identification information 810 before the display size switching before the reach development (before the display size switching). After the reach is developed (after the display size is switched), the display size (for example, the length in the left-right direction) of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size is switched can be 2 m times (m ≠ n). In this case, the decoration when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is smaller (for example, after the reach development) than the relative movement amount of the decoration unit 813 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large (for example, before the reach development). If the condition that the relative movement amount of the unit 813 is larger is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the misidentification of the player, and even if the decoration identification information 810 is small, a part of the decoration identification information 810 (here). Then, it becomes possible to make the decorative portion 813) stand out.

Further, the relative movement amount of the decoration unit 813 is not the movement amount based on the display size of the decoration identification information 810 (the movement amount of the decoration unit 813 relative to the display size of the decoration identification information 810), but the decoration unit. The amount of movement based on the display size of 813 (the amount of movement of the decorative portion 813 relative to the display size of the decorative portion 813) may be used. That is, when the first temporary stop symbol effect is executed in an effect mode in which the relative movement amount differs between before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, the relative movement amount is the decoration identification. It may be a part of the operation amount of the decoration identification information 810 with respect to the entire display size of the information 810, or may be a part of the operation amount of the decoration identification information 810 with respect to a part of the display size.

Further, among the production modes of the first temporary stop symbol effect, the effect mode in which the first cycle Y1 is different before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, and before the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched. It is also possible to execute in combination with an effect mode in which the relative amount of movement is different later.
Further, when the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect are executed at the same time, at least one of the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect is displayed with the decoration identification information 810. It may be executed in an effect mode in which the relative amount of movement differs between before and after the size is switched.

[Holding display effect]
In the gaming machine of each embodiment and each modification, the effect control device 300 is the storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 of the display device 41, in which the decorative special figure start memory display moves periodically. It is possible to execute a certain hold display effect.
Further, as shown in FIG. 73A, for example, the effect control device 300 has a display size of the decorative special figure start storage display (waiting hold 83a) displayed on the storage display unit 83, and the execution storage display unit 84. It is possible to make the display size of the decorative special figure start storage display (currently pending 84a) displayed on the display different from that of the display. Specifically, the decorative special figure start storage display (waiting hold 83a) displayed on the storage display unit 83 is a running storage display at the start of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure start storage display. It shifts to the section 84 and becomes the pending hold 84a, but when the decorative special figure start storage display arrives at the running memory display section 84 (or during the transition to the running memory display section 84), the decorative special figure It is possible to change (switch) the display size of the start memory display.

When performing an effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display swings in the vertical direction as a hold display effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the upward movement distance of the decorative special figure start memory display is The length of the decorative special figure start memory display in the vertical direction is N times (N = 0.5 in FIG. 73 (b)), and the downward movement distance of the decorative special figure start memory display is also the decorative special figure start. It is N times the length of the memory display in the vertical direction. That is, the amount of movement (absolute amount of movement) per cycle of the decorative special figure start memory display is 2N times the length of the decorative special figure start memory display in the vertical direction.

In FIG. 73 (b), the decorative special figure start memory display swings in the vertical direction, and the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display becomes large (length in the vertical direction) due to the shift to the running storage display unit 84. Is long). In the waiting hold 83a, the absolute amount of operation per cycle is 2N times the vertical length of the waiting hold 83a, and in the running hold 84a, the absolute operation amount per cycle is absolute. The amount of operation is 2N times the length of the pending 84a in the vertical direction.
That is, in FIG. 73 (b), the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the decorative special figure start memory display is the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display (in FIG. 73 (b), the length in the vertical direction). ). Therefore, the absolute movement amount of the decoration special figure start memory display (absolute movement amount per cycle visually recognized by the player) is before and after the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is switched (waiting). Although it differs between the hold 83a and the running hold 84a), the relative movement amount (the relative movement amount per cycle visually recognized by the player) with respect to the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is the decoration special. Figure The display size of the start storage display is the same before and after switching (waiting hold 83a and running hold 84a).

The decorative special figure start storage display (waiting hold 83a) before the display size is switched and the decorative special figure start storage display (running hold 84a) after the display size is switched are displayed at the same time (or are displayed at the same time). Often done). Specifically, when the special figure variation display game has an unexecuted start memory, the waiting hold 83a and the running hold 84a are displayed at the same time. Therefore, the relative amount of movement of the decorative special figure start memory display before and after the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display is switched (the relative decorative special figure start memory display relative to the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display). By making the amount of movement) the same, it is possible to execute a unified hold display effect in a state where the waiting hold 83a and the running hold 84a are displayed at the same time. It will increase.

On the other hand, the decoration identification information 810 before the display size is switched (for example, the decoration identification information 810 before the reach development) and the decoration identification information 810 after the display size is switched (for example, the decoration identification information 810 after the reach development) are Not displayed at the same time (or rarely displayed at the same time). Therefore, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 (the movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 relative to the display size of the decoration identification information 810) is made the same before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched. However, it is difficult to obtain the effect of being able to execute a temporary stop pattern effect with a sense of unity. Therefore, in the case of the decoration identification information 810, the relative movement amount may be the same or different before and after the display size is switched. In particular, when the information is different, the above-mentioned effects (effects such as suppressing misidentification by the player and conspicuous even if the decoration identification information 810 is small) can be obtained, which is preferable.

In the hold display effect, the swing direction of the decorative special figure start memory display is not limited to the vertical direction. That is, as a hold display effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display swings in the left-right direction, and the decorative special figure start memory display is in the left-right direction (clockwise / counterclockwise direction). It is also possible to perform a rotating effect.
Further, the hold display effect is not limited to the effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display swings (up / down movement, left / right movement, left / right rotation) at a predetermined cycle. That is, the hold display effect is not limited to the effect in which the display position of the decorative special figure start memory display changes periodically, and the display mode (display position, display size, shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the decorative special figure start memory display. Any effect may be used as long as the transparency (or a combination thereof) changes periodically.

For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), the hold display effect may be an effect in which the decorative special figure start storage display rotates at a predetermined cycle. In FIG. 73 (c), the plate-shaped decorative special figure start memory display rotates in one direction around an axis along the vertical direction (the plate-shaped decorative special figure start memory display rotates in one direction. The mode that seems to be present) is repeated. As a result, not only the front surface of the plate-shaped decorative special drawing start memory display but also the back surface can be visually recognized.
The axis of rotation when the decorative special drawing start memory display rotates is not limited to the axis along the vertical direction. The axis of rotation when the decorative special figure start memory display rotates is, for example, an axis parallel to the display screen of the display device 41 (that is, by rotation, not only the front surface but also the back surface of the plate-shaped decorative special figure start memory display can be visually recognized. Axis) or an axis orthogonal to the display screen of the display device 41.

In the hold display effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display is rotated, the rotation angle per cycle of the decorative special figure start memory display is 360 degrees regardless of the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display. That is, in the hold display effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display is rotated, when the operation amount of the decorative special figure start memory display is defined as the rotation angle of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display of the decorative special figure start memory display is displayed. When the size is large (pending 84a during execution) and when the display size of the decorative special figure start storage display is small (waiting hold 83a), the absolute operation amount of the decorative special figure start storage display is the same.

Further, in the hold display effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display is rotated, the moving distance per cycle of the predetermined point P (point not on the rotation axis) in the decorative special figure start memory display is the decoration special figure start. It is proportional to the display size of the memory display. That is, in the hold display effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display is rotated, when the movement amount of the decorative special figure start memory display is defined as the moving distance of a predetermined point P in the decorative special figure start memory display, the decorative special figure start memory display is defined as the moving distance. When the display size of the start memory display is large (pending 84a during execution) and when the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display is small (waiting hold 83a), the relative operation amount of the decorative special figure start memory display is Are the same.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), the shape of the waiting hold 83a is a regular disk shape with a radius r, and the shape of the running hold 84a is a regular disk shape with a radius R. When the intersection of the straight line perpendicular to the rotation axis of the decorative special figure start memory display and passing through the center point of the decorative special figure start memory display and the circumference of the decorative special figure start memory display is set to the predetermined point P. The moving distance per cycle of the predetermined point P in the waiting hold 83a is 2πr, and the moving distance of the predetermined point P in the running hold 84a is 2πR. Then, the display size (diameter) of the waiting hold 83a is 2r, and the display size (diameter) of the running hold 84a is 2R, so that the relative operation amount of the waiting hold 83a is π (= 2πr / 2r). Therefore, the relative amount of movement of the pending 84a during execution is also π (= 2πR / 2R).

In the hold display effect, the direction of operation of the decoration special figure start memory display (swing direction, rotation direction, etc.) is when the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is large (for example, running hold 84a). It is preferable that the display size of the start storage display is the same as that when the display size is small (for example, waiting 83a). This makes it possible to execute a more unified hold display effect. Of course, the direction of operation does not have to be the same when the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display is large and when it is small.
Further, in the hold display effect, the operation cycle of the decoration special figure start memory display is such that when the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is large (for example, the running hold 84a), the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is small. It is preferable that it is the same as when (for example, waiting 83a). This makes it possible to execute a more unified hold display effect. Of course, the operation cycle does not have to be the same when the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display is large and when it is small.

Further, in the hold display effect, the timing of the operation of the decoration special figure start memory display is such that when the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is large (for example, the running hold 84a), the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is large. When it is small (for example, waiting 83a), it is preferable to synchronize with. This makes it possible to execute a more unified hold display effect.
Specifically, for example, when performing an effect in which the decorative special figure start memory display swings in the vertical direction (for example, FIG. 73 (b)) as a hold display effect, the mode of moving upward is changed to downward. Decorate the timing to switch to the moving mode. Match the display size of the special figure start memory display when it is large and small, and decorate the timing to switch from the downward moving mode to the upward moving mode. By matching when the display size of is large and when it is small, it is possible to execute a more unified hold display effect.
Further, when the plate-shaped decorative special figure start memory display rotates about an axis parallel to the display screen of the display device 41 as the hold display effect (for example, FIG. 73 (c)), the decorative special figure is displayed. The timing at which only the front surface of the start memory display becomes visible is matched between when the display size is large and when the display size is small, and the timing when only the side surface is visible is matched between when the display size is large and when the display size is small, and only the back surface is visible. By matching the timing at which the display becomes visible when the display size is large and when the display size is small, it is possible to execute a more unified hold display effect.
Of course, the timing of operation does not have to be synchronized between when the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display is large and when it is small.

Further, in FIGS. 73A and 73B, the vertical length of the pending hold 84a is 2.0 times the vertical length of the waiting hold 83a, but the length is not limited to this. .. That is, the display size of the pending hold 84a may be larger than the display size of the waiting hold 83a.
Further, the display size of the pending hold 84a may be smaller than the display size of the waiting hold 83a. In this case as well, the relative amount of movement of the decorative special figure start memory display when the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display is large, and the decorative special figure start memory display when the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display is small. If the condition that the relative movement amount of the above is the same is satisfied, it is possible to execute the hold display effect with a sense of unity.

Further, the hold display effect is not limited to the effect that the entire decorative special figure start memory display moves periodically, and a part of the decorative special figure start memory display may move periodically. .. That is, even if the hold display effect is an effect in which the entire display mode (display position, display size, shape, color, pattern, transparency, etc., or a combination thereof) of the decorative special figure start memory display changes periodically. Alternatively, it may be an effect in which a part of the display mode (display position, display size, shape, color, pattern, transparency, etc., or a combination thereof) of the decorative special figure start memory display changes periodically.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, a start storage means (starting storage means) capable of storing the start memory which is the right to execute the game based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition. The game control device 100), the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, and the display means (display device 41) for displaying the game under the control of the effect control means are provided to control the effect. As the means, a decorative game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) corresponding to the game can be displayed on the display means, and the identification symbol during the temporary stop display operates. The identification symbol effect (temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed, the start memory display corresponding to the start memory (decorative special figure start memory display) can be displayed on the display means, and the start memory display operates. (Holding display effect) can be executed, and the operation amount (operation amount per unit time) of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect is when the display mode of the identification symbol is the first display mode (for example, before the display size is switched). ) And the case of the second display mode (for example, after switching the display size), the display mode of the start memory display is the third display mode of the start memory display (operation amount per unit time) in the start memory effect. The display mode is the same (for example, before the display size is switched) and the fourth display mode (for example, after the display size is switched) is the same (see FIGS. 72 and 73).

That is, the movement amount of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect changes when the display mode of the identification symbol is switched between the first display mode and the second display mode, whereas the movement amount of the start memory display in the start memory effect is changed. Does not change even if the display mode of the start memory display is switched between the third display mode and the fourth display mode. Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decorative game and the start memory display, but also to execute the effect that the identification symbol that is variablely displayed in the decorative game operates and the effect that the start memory display operates, and further, they operate together. Even in the case of directing, the presence or absence of a change in the amount of movement due to the switching of the display mode differs between the identification symbol and the start memory display, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The amount of movement of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect may be larger in the first display mode or larger in the second display mode. Further, the amount of movement of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect may be the same in the case of the first display mode and the case of the second display mode. Further, the operating amount in the first display mode and / or the operating amount in the second display mode may be "0".
Further, the operation amount of the start memory display in the start memory effect may be different between the case of the third display mode and the case of the fourth display mode. Further, the operating amount in the case of the third display mode and / or the operating amount in the case of the fourth display mode may be "0".

Further, the first display mode may be a display mode after the display size switching, instead of the display mode before the display size switching.
Further, the second display mode may be a display mode before the display size switching, not a display mode after the display size switching.
Further, the third display mode may be a display mode after the display size switching, instead of the display mode before the display size switching.
Further, the fourth display mode may be a display mode before the display size switching, not a display mode after the display size switching.

The display size is different between the identification symbol of the first display mode (decorative identification information 810 before the reach development) and the identification symbol of the second display mode (decorative identification information 810 after the reach development), and the identification symbol effect ( The operation amount in the temporary stop symbol effect) may be configured to be an operation amount of the identification symbol relative to the display size of the identification symbol. That is, the amount of movement of the identification symbol relative to the display size of the identification symbol may be configured to be different depending on whether the display mode of the identification symbol is the first display mode or the second display mode. (See FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c)).
With this configuration, when the display size of the identification symbol is switched, the amount of movement relative to the display size changes, so it is possible to execute the identification symbol effect with the amount of movement that is not proportional to the display size. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the misidentification of the player, and it is possible to make the decoration identification information 810 stand out even if the decoration identification information 810 is small, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The amount of movement of the identification symbol relative to the display size of the identification symbol may be larger in the first display mode or larger in the second display mode. Further, the amount of movement of the identification symbol relative to the display size of the identification symbol may be the same in the case of the first display mode and the case of the second display mode.
Further, the period during which the identification symbol of the first display mode is displayed is not limited to the period before the reach development.
Further, the period during which the identification symbol of the second display mode is displayed is not limited after the reach development.
Further, the timing at which the display size of the identification symbol changes (switches) is not limited to the time of reach development.

Further, the display size may be larger for the identification symbol of the first display mode or may be larger for the identification symbol of the second display mode.
Further, the display size may be the same for the identification symbol of the first display mode and the identification symbol of the second display mode. That is, the identification symbol of the first display mode and the identification symbol of the second display mode may have different display sizes, or may have different display modes other than the display size.
Further, the amount of movement in the identification symbol effect (temporary stop symbol effect) is not limited to the amount of movement of the identification symbol relative to the display size of the identification symbol. That is, the motion amount in the identification symbol effect (temporary stop symbol effect) may be a relative motion amount or an absolute motion amount.

Further, the display size is different between the start storage display (waiting hold 83a) in the third display mode and the start storage display (running hold 84a) in the fourth display mode, and the above-mentioned in the start storage effect (hold display effect). The motion amount may be configured to be the motion amount of the start memory display relative to the display size of the start memory display. That is, the operation amount of the start memory display relative to the display size of the start memory display (for example, the operation amount = the moving distance of the predetermined point P (the point not on the rotation axis) in the start memory display) is the start memory display. The display mode may be configured to be the same depending on whether the display mode is the third display mode or the fourth display mode (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 73 (c)).
With this configuration, the amount of movement relative to the display size does not change even if the display size of the start memory display is switched, so it is possible to execute the start memory effect with the amount of movement proportional to the display size. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to execute a unified start memory effect in a state where the start memory display of the third display mode and the start memory display of the fourth display mode are displayed at the same time, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be able to.

The amount of operation of the start storage display relative to the display size of the start storage display may differ between the case of the third display mode and the case of the fourth display mode.
Further, the start memory display of the third display mode is not limited to the waiting hold 83a. That is, the start memory display of the third display mode may be the execution hold 84a.
Further, the start storage display of the fourth display mode is not limited to the execution hold 84a. That is, the start memory display of the fourth display mode may be the waiting hold 83a.
Further, the timing at which the display size of the start memory display changes (switches) is not limited to the start of the game corresponding to the start memory display.

Further, the display size may be larger in the start memory display of the third display mode, or may be larger in the start memory display of the fourth display mode.
Further, the display size may be the same between the start memory display of the third display mode and the start memory display of the fourth display mode. That is, the start memory display of the third display mode and the start memory display of the fourth display mode may have different display sizes, or may have different display modes other than the display size.
Further, the operation amount in the start storage effect (hold display effect) is not limited to the operation amount of the start memory display relative to the display size of the start memory display. That is, the operation amount in the start storage effect (hold display effect) may be a relative operation amount or an absolute operation amount.

Further, the start memory effect (hold display effect) is an effect in which the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) is rotated, and the operation amount in the start memory effect is configured to be the rotation angle of the start memory display. You may. That is, the rotation angle of the start memory display may be configured to be the same in the case where the display mode of the start memory display is the third display mode and the case where the display mode is the fourth display mode (FIG. 73 (c). )reference).
With this configuration, the rotation angle of the start memory display does not change even if the display size of the start memory display is switched, so that the start memory effect can be executed at a constant angular velocity regardless of the display size. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to execute a unified start memory effect in a state where the start memory display of the third display mode and the start memory display of the fourth display mode are displayed at the same time, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be able to.
The rotation angle (rotation angle per unit time) of the start memory display may be different depending on whether the display mode of the start memory display is the third display mode or the fourth display mode.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the information about the game corresponding to the start memory display by displaying the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) in a specific display mode. The operation amount of the start memory display in the start memory effect (hold display effect) may be configured to be the same before and after the display mode of the start memory display changes to a specific display mode.
Specifically, the effect control means changes the display mode (for example, color) of the start memory display to a specific display mode, thereby suggesting the result-related information of the game corresponding to the start memory display (pending change). Direction) can be executed. Then, depending on whether the display mode of the start memory display has changed to a specific display mode or not, the operation amount of the start memory display in the start memory effect (hold display effect) (the above-mentioned in the start memory effect). It is possible to make the operation amount) the same.
With this configuration, even if a hold change effect that suggests a look-ahead result is performed using the start memory display during the execution of the start memory effect, it is possible to continue the start memory effect with a sense of unity. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
The amount of operation of the start memory display in the start memory effect (hold display effect) may differ between before and after the display mode of the start memory display changes to a specific display mode.

Further, the identification symbol effect (temporary stop symbol effect) is an effect in which a part or the whole of the identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) in the temporary stop display is operated.
Therefore, since it is possible to execute the identification symbol effect in which a part or the whole of the identification symbol during the temporary stop display is operated, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the start memory effect (hold display effect) is an effect in which a part or the whole of the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) operates.
Therefore, since it is possible to execute the start memory effect in which a part or the whole of the start memory display operates, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the display mode of the identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) may be configured to switch from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the development of the reach effect.
With this configuration, the amount of movement in the identification symbol effect changes based on the development of the reach effect, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.
The opportunity to switch from the first display mode to the second display mode is not limited to the development of the reach effect.
Further, the display mode of the identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) may be switched from the second display mode to the first display mode.

Further, the display mode of the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) is configured to switch from the third display mode to the fourth display mode based on the start of the game corresponding to the start memory display. Is also good.
With this configuration, even if the game corresponding to the start memory display is started, the operation amount in the start memory effect does not change, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.
The trigger for switching the display mode of the start memory display from the third display mode to the fourth display mode is not limited to the start of the game corresponding to the start memory display.
Further, the display mode of the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) may be switched from the fourth display mode to the third display mode.

Further, the identification symbol of the first display mode and the identification symbol of the second display mode are not displayed at the same time, and the start memory display of the third display mode and the start memory display of the fourth display mode are It may be configured so that it may be displayed at the same time.
With this configuration, the movement amount (the movement amount in the identification symbol effect) differs between the identification symbol of the first display mode and the identification symbol of the second display mode, which are not displayed at the same time, and are displayed at the same time. The operation amount (the operation amount in the start memory effect) can be made the same between the start memory display of the third display mode and the start memory display of the fourth display mode. Therefore, it is possible to execute a unified start memory effect in a state where the start memory display of the third display mode and the start memory display of the fourth display mode are displayed at the same time, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be able to.
The identification symbol of the first display mode and the identification symbol of the second display mode may be displayed at the same time.
Further, the start memory display of the third display mode and the start memory display of the fourth display mode may not be displayed at the same time.

In addition, in a game machine that can execute a game (special figure variation display game) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and generate a state advantageous to the player according to the result of the game, the game is played based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition. The start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory that is the execution right, the effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game, and the effect control means to display the game. A display means (display device 41) is provided, and the effect control means can display a decorative game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variablely displays an identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) corresponding to the game on the display means. At the same time, it is possible to execute an identification symbol effect (temporary stop symbol effect) in which the identification symbol being temporarily stopped is periodically operated, and a start memory display (decorative special symbol start memory display) corresponding to the start memory is displayed. In addition to being displayable on the means, it is possible to execute a start memory effect (hold display effect) in which the start memory display periodically operates, and the operation cycle of the identification symbol (for example, the second cycle Y2) in the identification symbol effect is the said. The display mode of the identification symbol differs between the case where the display mode is the first display mode and the case where the display mode is the second display mode (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)), and the operation cycle of the start memory display in the start memory effect is the said. The display mode of the start memory display may be configured to be the same in the case where the display mode is the third display mode and the case where the display mode is the fourth display mode.

With this configuration, the operation cycle of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect changes when the display mode of the identification symbol is switched between the first display mode and the second display mode, whereas in the start memory effect. The operation cycle of the start memory display does not change even if the display mode of the start memory display is switched between the third display mode and the fourth display mode. Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decorative game and the start memory display, but also to execute an effect in which the identification symbol variablely displayed in the decorative game operates periodically and an effect in which the start memory display operates periodically. Furthermore, even in the case of an effect that operates together, the presence or absence of a change in the operation cycle due to the switching of the display mode differs between the identification symbol and the start memory display, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The operation cycle of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect may be longer in the case of the first display mode or longer in the case of the second display mode. Further, the operation cycle of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect may be the same in the case of the first display mode and the case of the second display mode. Further, the operation cycle in the case of the first display mode and / or the operation cycle in the case of the second display mode may be infinite. That is, the operating amount in the first display mode and / or the operating amount in the second display mode may be "0".
Further, the operation cycle of the start memory display in the start memory effect may be different between the case of the third display mode and the case of the fourth display mode. Further, the operation cycle in the case of the third display mode and / or the operation cycle in the case of the fourth display mode may be infinite. That is, the operating amount in the third display mode and / or the operating amount in the fourth display mode may be "0".

In addition, in a game machine that can execute a game (special figure variation display game) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and generate a state advantageous to the player according to the result of the game, the game is played based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition. The start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory that is the execution right, the effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game, and the effect control means to display the game. A display means (display device 41) is provided, and the effect control means can display a decorative game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variablely displays an identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) corresponding to the game on the display means. At the same time, it is possible to execute an identification symbol effect (temporary stop symbol effect) in which the display mode of the identification symbol during the temporary stop display changes, and a start memory display (decorative special symbol start memory display) corresponding to the start memory is displayed. It is possible to execute a start memory effect (hold display effect) in which the display mode of the start memory display changes while being displayable on the means, and the amount of change in the display mode of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect (change amount per unit time). ) Is different depending on whether the display size of the identification symbol is the first size (for example, before the display size is switched) or the second size (for example, after the display size is switched), and the display of the start memory display in the start memory effect is displayed. The amount of change in the embodiment (amount of change per unit time) is when the display size of the start storage display is the third size (for example, before the display size is switched) and when it is the fourth size (for example, after the display size is switched). Is the same (see FIGS. 72 and 73).

That is, the amount of change in the display mode of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect changes when the display size of the identification symbol is switched between the first size and the second size, whereas the display of the start memory display in the start memory effect is displayed. The amount of change in the embodiment does not change even if the display size of the start storage display is switched between the third size and the fourth size. Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decorative game and the start memory display, but also to perform an effect of changing the display mode of the identification symbol that is variablely displayed in the decorative game and an effect of changing the display mode of the start memory display. Furthermore, even if the display mode changes in both cases, the presence or absence of a change in the display mode due to the switching of the display size differs between the identification symbol and the start memory display, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. ..

The amount of change in the display mode of the identification symbol is not limited to the amount of change in the display position of the identification symbol (specifically, the moving distance per unit time of the decorative identification information 810 (see FIG. 72)).
Further, the amount of change in the display mode of the start memory display is the amount of change in the display position of the start memory display (specifically, the movement distance per unit time of the decorative special figure start memory display (see FIG. 73 (b)). For the rotation angle per unit time of the decorative special figure start memory display (see FIG. 73 (c)) and the movement distance per unit time of the predetermined point P in the decorative special figure start memory display (see FIG. 73 (c)). Not limited.
That is, the amount of change in the display mode may be the amount of change in the display position, the amount of change in the display size, the amount of change in shape, the amount of change in color, the amount of change in pattern, the amount of change in transparency, or the like. It may be a combination of. For example, when the amount of change in the display mode is the amount of change in color, the change from white to gray and then to black per unit time changes from white to gray per unit time (for black). The amount of change is larger than in the case of (does not change).

Further, the amount of change in the display mode of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect may be larger in the case of the first size or may be larger in the case of the second size. Further, the amount of change in the display mode of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect may be the same between the case of the first size and the case of the second size. Further, the amount of change in the case of the first size and / or the amount of change in the case of the second size may be "0".
Further, the amount of change in the display mode of the start memory display in the start memory effect may be different between the case of the third size and the case of the fourth size. Further, the amount of change in the case of the third size and / or the amount of change in the case of the fourth size may be "0".

Further, the first size may not be the display mode before the display size switching, but may be the display mode after the display size switching.
Further, the second size may be a display mode before the display size switching, not a display mode after the display size switching.
Further, the third size may not be the display mode before the display size switching, but may be the display mode after the display size switching.
Further, the fourth size may be a display mode before the display size switching, not a display mode after the display size switching.

Further, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a start storage means (game control device) capable of storing a start memory that is a right to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The effect control means includes a 100), an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, and a display unit (display device 41) controlled by the effect control means to display the game. The first start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) and the second start memory display (number displayed on the start memory number display unit 85) corresponding to the start memory can be displayed on the display means, and the first start can be displayed. It is possible to execute the start memory effect (hold display effect) in which the memory display operates, and the operation amount (operation amount per unit time) of the first start memory display in the start memory effect is the display mode of the first start memory display. Is the same in the case of the first display mode (for example, before the display size switching) and in the case of the second display mode (for example, after the display size switching) (see FIG. 73).
Therefore, not only the first start memory display and the second start memory display can be displayed, but also the effect that the first start memory display operates can be executed, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The amount of operation of the start memory display in the start memory effect may be different between the case of the first display mode and the case of the second display mode. Further, the operating amount in the first display mode and / or the operating amount in the second display mode may be "0".
Further, the first display mode may be a display mode after the display size switching, instead of the display mode before the display size switching.
Further, the second display mode may be a display mode before the display size switching, not a display mode after the display size switching.
Further, the first start memory display is not limited to the decorative special figure start memory display, and the second start memory display is not limited to the number displayed on the start memory number display unit 85 (the number representing the start memory number). For example, among the decorative special figure start storage displays, the waiting hold 83a may be used as the first start storage display, and the running hold 84a may be used as the second start storage display. In this case, the hold change effect is not executed. The waiting hold 83a may be used as the first start storage display of the first display mode, and the waiting hold 83a in the state where the hold change effect is being executed may be used as the first start storage display of the second display mode. That is, a normal display mode (a display mode that does not suggest result-related information) may be used as the first display mode, and a specific display mode (display mode that can suggest result-related information) may be used as the second display mode.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-mentioned modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Pachinko machine 41 Display device (display means)
100 Game control device (starting storage means)
300 Production control device (Production control means)
810 Ornamental identification information (identification pattern)
811 Number part 812 Character part 813 Decoration part

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions
A start storage means capable of storing start memory, which is the right to execute the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition,
Production control means to control the production of the game,
A display means that is controlled by the effect control means to display a game is provided.
The effect control means is
The first start memory display and the second start memory display corresponding to the start memory can be displayed on the display means, and the start memory effect in which the first start memory display operates can be executed.
The operation amount of the first start memory display in the start memory effect is the same in the case where the display mode of the first start memory display is the first display mode and the case where the display mode is the second display mode. A game machine to play.

Images